Class _RLS1_ 
 BookJl3 
 
 Copyright N°J_iM. 
 
 COPmiGHT DIvPOSST. 
 
THE SKIN 
 
 1^ 
 
 6*7 
 
 Its Care and Treatment 
 
 According to the Michaud System 
 
 Teaching every detail of this 
 
 important work, in a simple, 
 
 concise and practical 
 
 m a n n e r 
 
 
 Mcintosh Battery c&f Optical Company 
 
 CHICAGO 
 

 THI UMAjiy Of 
 Two Coplti Ruilvtrf 
 
 SEP 8 IMS 
 
 63779 
 
 COPY 8. ' 
 
 <N 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 Copyright, 1903. 
 McIntosh Battery & Optical Co. 
 
DEDICATION. 
 
 To the earnest student who realizes the vital need for 
 thorough instruction in the important work of caring for 
 the skin, this book is affectionately dedicated. That the 
 experience of years may have been sufficient to make 
 this volume a trusty guide to others who are but com- 
 mencing their work, is the ardent wish of the author. 
 
[NTRODUCTION. 
 
 The desire to understand the best manner of caring foi 
 
 the skin, and what materials to use in this work, is one that 
 has become very generally acknowledged by intelligent 
 women within the past five years. Before this time, al- 
 though perhaps quite as many were interested, there was 
 an impression that a poor complexion could not be improved, 
 while a good one needed nothing to preserve its beauty. 
 The first wrinkle was greeted as a natural consequence, even 
 though it appeared at twenty-five in one woman, ten years 
 later in another, and perhaps during school days in another. 
 Crow's feet were expected, and came obligingly, quite pre- 
 pared to remain. The yellow tinge, so disastrous to the 
 blonde, was immediately labeled as liver trouble, and all 
 of these defects allowed to become chronic afflictions instead 
 of being temporary blemishes. 
 
 To the best dermatologists, much of this apprehension 
 is due, for, engrossed by the study and treatment of strange 
 eczemas, obscure skin eruptions and malignant growths, 
 these other matters have seemed so trifling that they have 
 either neglected to pay any attention to this branch, or given 
 advice so carelessly that the patients had not confidence 
 enough in the results to attempt the work. These so-called 
 trifles often make or mar a woman's happiness, and instead 
 of being laughingly told that she is foolish to attempt to 
 defer the coming of old age, and the appearance of the 
 many folds and the sallow skin, she should be assured that 
 the beauty of any skin may be preserved indefinitely with 
 proper care, while poor complexions may be made wonder- 
 fully better. 
 
 iii 
 
iv INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The careful housewife is well aware that constant at- 
 tention is necessary if she would keep her home attractive. 
 This same rule applies to the care of the face and the body. 
 It has been the aim of the author to explain to women that 
 if they would obtain the desired results, there must not only 
 be the necessary applications, but also sufficient attention to 
 the diet, the daily bath, and the proper exercise. 
 
 The maiden should be instructed not only what to do for 
 the skin, but also what to avoid. The wise mother realizes 
 this, and copies the method of the successful gardener. As 
 he with pruning knife and shears clips away the weakening 
 tendrils, and plucks out weeds that threaten to hamper the 
 growth of the vine, so must she watchfully tear away dis- 
 agreeable peculiarities and weed out harmful habits if she 
 would see the tender bud develop into the glorious blos- 
 som. 
 
 Instead of being discouraged in the practice of the little 
 vanities so natural to the heart of the young girl, she should 
 be wisely directed, and carefully instructed in the anatomy 
 of the skin, its possibilities and its limitations. The average 
 maiden has an ardent desire to be beautiful. Every heroine 
 she can remember from the "Sleeping Princess" of her 
 childhood days to the mysterious and fascinating produc- 
 tion of the modern novelist, has been as enchanting as the 
 writer's pen could make her. Naturally, she, too, dreams 
 of becoming a vision so bewildering that all shall adore 
 her, and seeks impatiently for the aid that shall transform 
 her. Denied the sympathy she craves at home, she will 
 wander forth intent only on her mission, and thus too often 
 becomes the prey of unscrupulous "semi-professionals," who 
 make impossible promises and charge outrageous prices for 
 harmful work. 
 
 The awakening from an experience of this kind is bitter 
 
INTRODUCTION. \ 
 
 indeed and the result is seen in the soured and suspicious 
 women who doubt the existence of real benefit in anything 
 pertaining to the care <>f the skin. They will not only re- 
 fuse to be coaxed into trying remedies themselves, but also 
 use their influence to persuade their friends that all such 
 work is useless. The only argument to be used against 
 the endeavors of people of this type is the very conclusive 
 one of proving to them what may be accomplished by em- 
 ploying simple, natural methods. 
 
 There are in reality very few hopelessly plain women. 
 Care will perform wonders for any one, and the earlier in 
 life this lesson is learned the better for -the student. 
 
 The girl with the Rocky Mountain features, sandy hair 
 and freckles may make herself positively repulsive by pull- 
 ing her hair tightly back and fastening it in a tight knot at 
 the back of her head, exposing herself with no protection to 
 the skin ; in all kinds of weather, and finally by degenerating 
 into a round-shouldered, bony picture of despair. A little 
 attention, a few words of advice, wise direction, and be- 
 hold, a willowy, smiling vision, the really fine hair loosely 
 coiled about the head, softening the outline of the features, 
 the complexion soft and beautiful as a result of the neces- 
 sary exertion morning and evening. Contentment has re- 
 placed morbid dissatisfaction and a spirit of good fellow- 
 ship impels her to help others to learn what may be done 
 for them. 
 
 The swarthy maiden with heavy, black, bristling brows 
 meeting in a point over the center of the nose, dull, color- 
 less complexion, awkward, ambling gait and oily, coarse 
 skin, is quite as desperate until she learns that the electric 
 needle will permanently remove the point ; tiny scissors trim 
 the bristles into the delicate arch, proper care, refine and 
 bleach the skin. Practice in physical culture will soon en- 
 
vi INTRODUCTION. 
 
 tirely change the carriage, and if under all this care the 
 color does not appear, a harmless tint may be employed, and 
 behold a different creature, her black eyes glowing with hap- 
 piness, her presence breathing of good health. 
 
 The nondescript damsel, with eyes, hair and complexion 
 that seem to have been selected from a jumble and thrown 
 carelessly at her, has the most difficult time of all. A little 
 study will enable her to find the style she should adopt, and 
 then she must work accordingly. Invisible eyebrows may be 
 coaxed into a well defined line, the fiery freckles frightened 
 away by the use of ointments, the figure will develop aston- 
 ishingly under proper work, and in short the "ugly duck- 
 ling" will disappear and graciously give place to the beau- 
 tiful swan. 
 
 So instances may be multiplied, in which a little knowl- 
 edge has been of inestimable benefit to those who by im- 
 proved appearance may alter the conditions of their life. 
 Nature's failures are too numerous to convince the student 
 that "whatever is, is right.'' She must learn to discriminate, 
 and must resolve to spare no effort toward repairing de- 
 fects that may exist, as well as to use discretion in preserv- 
 ing the perfect skin that is occasionally found. Love of the 
 beautiful is natural and universal, and those who have not 
 the good fortune to be born with all the attributes neces- 
 sary to the perfect type, may at least stretch out their hands 
 toward the aids that may enable them to remedy the grav- 
 est faults, remembering always, that with health as a foun- 
 dation, common sense as an aid, and perseverance to inspire, 
 the results will indeed be satisfactory. 
 
 When it has been possible to know of these facts in 
 youth, so much the better. If not there is still hope, for the 
 clever woman realizes that as she grows older she improves 
 mentally. Ripened by experience, at no time is her intel- 
 
INTRODUCTION. vii 
 
 lect more powerful, her wit keener, nor her judgment better 
 
 than after she has passed the half century mark. 
 
 Physiological development has enabled her to maintain 
 the erect carriage, full chest and well proportioned figure 
 
 of her youth, and she now sees as never before the impor- 
 tance of the daily work, which, properly employed, will ban- 
 ish the lines traced by the gathering years, prevent the wast- 
 ing of the tissues and preserve the contour and firm tex- 
 ture of the skin. 
 
 The power of beauty is universally acknowledged. In 
 all countries, in all ages and by all types of men, poets and 
 warriors, artists and statesmen, susceptible striplings and 
 phlegmatic business men, alike testify to the potent influence 
 of this wonderful gift. 
 
 It has been perhaps due to a realization of this fact that 
 so many women have despaired, for after beholding the 
 loveliness of others they who were but meagerly endowed 
 with charms so lavishly bestowed upon more fortunate 
 rivals felt that it was useless to persevere in work which 
 could but make them less repulsive. To women of this 
 type the certainty of improvement so great as to be well 
 worth while has been a wonderful stimulus. And as a con- 
 sequence the shrinking, self conscious and unattractive wom- 
 an of thirty-five has often been developed into a social 
 power before she has reached forty. The mere realization of 
 her success so fills her with quiet joy that she unconscious- 
 ly inspires her associates with an ambition to follow her 
 example. 
 
 A wise man once remarked "that to satisfy others one 
 must be self-satisfied/' This statement is indeed true and 
 should stimulate the negligent into an effort to make the 
 most of opportunities. The young girl should labor unceas- 
 ingly to obtain the degree of perfection to which her very 
 
viii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 youth entitles her. The woman of thirty may have se- 
 cured her knowledge later in life, but still not too late to 
 know that by sufficient care she may postpone the appear- 
 ance of age for years to come. Older women must be con- 
 vinced that much may be done toward repairing the damages 
 wrought by neglect and carelessness, and all women should 
 be persuaded that it is quite as essential to devote a certain 
 amount of time each day to personal attention as it is to 
 waste hours in foolish gossip, embroidering useless doilies, 
 or in caring for expensive ornaments. The chief ornament 
 of any home is the woman who presides over it, and she 
 should be ambitious enough to realize the importance of 
 work that will aid her to preserve the charms she has, as 
 well as to assist her in acquiring those she may be without. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAPTER I.— The Appearance of the Normal Skin 15 
 
 The necessity for the use of pure soaps and oils. The ef- 
 fect of irritation upon the scarf skin. Experiment in skin 
 grafting. 
 
 CHAPTER II.— Why Creams are Necessary 20 
 
 Value as a protecting agent. Use of ointments among the 
 ancients. Requirements of the skin. The folly of using any 
 substitute in place of a pure oil. 
 
 CHAPTER III.— The Manufacture of Creams 24 
 
 Necessary equipment. How to recognize the pure oils. 
 Recipes for making creams. 
 
 CHAPTER IV.— Wrinkles, and What Causes Them 32 
 
 The presence of habit lines explained. Cosmetics and 
 mechanical appliances to be used with discretion. Best manner 
 of preventing lines of age. 
 
 CHAPTER V.— Why we Massage 8H 
 
 The ideal masseuse, and her method of work. How often 
 massage should be taken. How to prepare the face for massage. 
 Value of cleansing the skin thoroughly. How to massage. 
 
 CHAPTER VI.— How to Massage 42 
 
 Why there is one system of work. Manner of using the 
 fingers. Length of treatments. Use of the water massage. Elec- 
 tric vibratile and mallets as valuable adjuncts to the fingers. 
 How to apply an astringent. 
 
 CHAPTER VII.— Blackheads, Pimples and Milia 55 
 
 Absolute assurance of success in most loathsome cases 
 
 when proper precautions are taken. Cause of blackheads. How 
 
 to use the comedone extractor. Method of opening pimples. 
 
 Cleansing the cavities, and after treatment. Use of the negative 
 
 needles to obstinate cases. 
 
 ix 
 
x CONTEXTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAPTER VIII.— Diet and Directions for Home Work 
 
 in Cure of Blackheads, Pimples, Etc 66 
 
 Manner of treating oily skins. Use of green soap. Importance 
 of proper diet, exercise and bathing. Importance of persistent 
 efforts. How to proceed in removal of milia. Use of the gal- 
 vanic current, followed by water massage in every case. 
 
 CHAPTER IX.— Chloasma 73 
 
 Application of powerful remedies for purpose of bleaching 
 the skin a mistake. Value of mild treatments aided by electricity. 
 Manner of treatment. Use of dioxide of hydrogen as a bleaching 
 agent. 
 
 CHAPTER X.— Oily, Stippled and Sallow Skins 77 
 
 Advisability of thoroughly cleansing the skin of face and 
 body daily. Suggestions as to diet. Use of mask for refining the 
 skin. Best method of whitening muddy complexion. Value of 
 massage in connection with the whitening process. 
 
 CHAPTER XL— Scaly, Dry and Flabby Skins 83 
 
 Precautions to be observed in use of water or soap for cleans- 
 ing. Oil mixture for sensitive skins. Value of electricity in re- 
 storing tone to flabby and withered skins. 
 
 CHAPTER XII.— Freckles, Tan and Sunburn 87 
 
 Removal of freckles and precautions to be observed in pro- 
 tecting the tender skin. How to prevent tan. Ways of avoiding 
 sunburn. Indolence or ignorance usually responsible for dis- 
 comfort. 
 
 CHAPTER XIIL— The Use of Powder 92 
 
 A pure powder advisable as a protecting agent. Method of 
 manufacturing. Recipes for bathing powder, face powder and 
 a liquid cosmetic. Manner of applying powder. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV.— The Art of Bathing 97 
 
 The educated bather and her favorite bath. Use of lotion 
 for softening the bath water. Jelly of violets for preventing rough- 
 ness of the skin. Sulphur, bran and electric baths and how to 
 take them. Strongly alkaline soap to be avoided. 
 CHAPTER XV. — The Subject of Sterilizing Instru- 
 ments 103 
 
 Strength of solution used in sterilizing hands and finger 
 
con 1 1.\ rs xi 
 
 PAGl 
 
 nails. Boiling process for instruments. Care to be observed in 
 the use of cream. Demand lor conscientious work in this re- 
 spect. 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. Usi oi Electricity 108 
 
 Simple experiment by which current maybe produced. The 
 best battery for ordinary use. Number of cells usually neces- 
 sary. How to prevent scars. Use of zinc ointment in allaying 
 inflammation. Reappearance of hair. Treatment of eruptions 
 when complicated with growth, etc. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII— The Removal of Superfluous Hair.. 121 
 
 Directions for equipment. Position of patient. Use of neg- 
 ative pole, and how to insert the needle. Length of time neces- 
 sary for each treatment. Advisability of using the bulbous 
 needle. Treatment of skin after use of electricity. 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. — The Treatment of Moles, Warts, 
 
 X.kvi 121) 
 
 Precautions to be observed in the removal of bristly hair 
 before attempting treatment of the mole. Necessity for observ- 
 ing the appearance of the normal skin near portion worked upon. 
 Number of treatments necessary and variation in different cases. 
 Necessity for stronger current in treatment of warts. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. — Blanching the Skin, Discoloration, 
 
 and Use of the Faradic Current 187 
 
 Curing red noses. Galvanic current as used in restoring 
 tone to the skin. Method of using needle in Acne Rosacea. 
 Removal of discolorations. Experiments in cataphoresis. Rapid 
 method of bleaching the skin. Use of Faradic current in 
 massage. Value of massage roller and vibratile. Stimulating 
 effect of the current as shown in use of neurotone. Beneficial 
 results obtained in treatment of scalp by means of brush attached 
 to Faradic current. 
 
 CHAPTER XX. -Care of the Hands 150 
 
 The ideal hand. Manner of washing the hands properly. 
 I fee of rose jelly. Keeping hands smooth. Red and swollen 
 hands. Cosmetic mittens and whitening paste refining agents. 
 Disguise for red hands. Instruments used in manicuring.- Rec- 
 ipes for polishing powder and bleaching lotion for nails. 
 
xii CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 CHAPTER XXL— How to Improve the Arms, Shoulders, 
 
 N eck and Bust 159 
 
 Value of exercise in developing arms. How to banish rough- 
 ness of the skin of arms. How to bleach the hair. Use of the 
 depilatory in obstinate cases. Massage and electric treatments. 
 Developing neck and bust. 
 
 CHAPTER XXII.— Mouth and Teeth 165 
 
 Beautiful teeth as rare as perfect gems. Cosmetic defects of 
 the mouth and how to treat them. Receding gums. How to 
 improve them. Removal of incrustations or yellowish deposits 
 upon the teeth. The best dentifrice and how to use it. Method 
 of cleansing the teeth. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIIL— Care of the Feet 173 
 
 Importance of selecting sensible footwear. Massage of the 
 feet. Treatment of swollen joints. How to cure ingrown nails 
 and corns. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV.— Care of the Hair 178 
 
 Hair as the connecting link between vegetable and animal 
 tissue. Cleansing of the scalp. Manner of shampooing. How 
 to destroy vermin. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. Treatment of Scalp and Hair 184 
 
 Massage of the scalp. Stimulating tonic. Electric treat- 
 ments of much value in stopping the falling of the hair. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI.— The Treatment of Dandruff or 
 
 Scurf 189 
 
 Removal of crusts by means of application of ointments. 
 Special shampoo for obstinate cases. Necessity for frequent 
 shampoo until condition is remedied. Imperative need for 
 earnest work. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII— How to Dye and Bleach the Hair. . . 195 
 
 Use of a hair dye cannot be permanent. Process of Dyeing. 
 How to bleach the hair. How to brighten dull shades. Artificial 
 appearance always imparted by bleached hair. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIIL— How to Grow Thin 201 
 
 Rapid process of reduction almost invariably dangerous. 
 
CONTENTS. xiii 
 
 PAGE 
 Causes of obesity. Value of physical activity. Loss of vital 
 capacity always found in obese conditions. Diet and directions 
 for reduction of flesh. Table of weights. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX. How to Become Plump 206 
 
 Breathing exercises of much benefit. Necessity for proper 
 amount of rest. Importance of overcoming undue nervousness. 
 Diet, as advocated by best authorities. 
 
 CHAPTER XXX.— Physiological Development 210 
 
 Propriety of encouraging interest in this work among the 
 middle aged. Experiment conducted by prominent educator 
 and results. Wonderful benefits to be obtained by full breath- 
 ing. Allowance of air necessary for each person. Bad effect 
 caused by rapid violent breathing. Manner in which the busy 
 women may secure best results from these exercises. A list of 
 the most beneficial breathing exercises. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI.— Body Movements 221 
 
 List of exercises suitable for the majority of cases. Strength- 
 ening of muscles, arms, legs and back, especially considered. 
 Symmetrical development easily obtained by sufficient work. 
 
FULL PAGE ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 Figure 
 
 1. 
 
 Figure 
 
 2. 
 
 Figure 
 
 3. 
 
 Figure 
 
 4. 
 
 Figure 
 
 5. 
 
 Figure 
 
 6. 
 
 Figure 
 
 7. 
 
 Figure 
 
 8. 
 
 Figure 
 
 9. 
 
 Figure 
 
 10. 
 
 Figure 
 
 11. 
 
 Figure 12. 
 
 Figure 
 
 13. 
 
 Figure 
 
 14. 
 
 Figure 15. 
 
 Figure 
 
 16. 
 
 Figure 17. 
 
 Figure 
 
 18. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Using the Water Massage 40 
 
 Erasing the Long Lines 43 
 
 Lines About the Face 45 
 
 Massage — Rotary Motion 47 
 
 Massage of the Eyelid 49 
 
 Massage of the Xeck 51 
 
 Massage with Use of the Mallet 53 
 
 Using the Comedone Extractor 59 
 
 Using the Hypodermic Syringe 61 
 
 A Smooth Skin After Skillful Work. 63 
 
 Removal of Superfluous Hair 121 
 
 Removal of Moles 130 
 
 Losing the Galvanic Current 138 
 
 Massage with Use of the Faradic Current 141 
 
 Use of the Massage Roller 143 
 
 L^se of the Vibratile 145 
 
 Use of the Neurotone 147 
 
 Using the Hairbrush Electrode 186 
 
CHAPTER I. 
 
 Till- APPEAR \\i l 01 l Ml-- XOKM ,\l. SKIN. 
 
 The perfect skin is soft, smooth with a transparent lus- 
 ter, elastic and moist, with a coloring that differs greatly 
 in individuals. In some instances it is like pale ivory, in 
 others a pearly white, often a pinkish cast may be found, 
 while certain nationalities possess the peculiar brownish, yel- 
 low tints found in the Spanish and Italians. 
 
 The exposed portions of the skin are darker than those 
 protected by the clothing, and on close examination the sur- 
 face will not appear smooth, but covered with the tiniest 
 and finest of lines, some parallel, others intersecting, while 
 in addition a growth of soft, almost colorless hair called 
 lanugo is seen to be abundant. It is due to this peculiarity 
 of structure, with its tiny furrows and elevations and soft 
 down of the "wool hair," that the delicacy of appearance 
 exists. 
 
 The skin is about one-tenth of an inch thick, and is pro- 
 vided with a natural oil, exuding imperceptibly under or- 
 dinary conditions, and keeping the flesh soft and pliable. 
 Perspiration is excreted by the glands and carbonic acid 
 gas is eliminated, while oxygen is absorbed. Thus, liquids, 
 ointments and substances intended to correct the various de- 
 fects may also be forced into the skin, and when rapid re- 
 sults are required the necessity exists for frequent bathing 
 in connection with proper manipulation. 
 
 The epidermis, or cuticle, is the outer layer of the skin 
 and is exposed to the air on one side and attached to the 
 corium on the other. This exposure to the air naturally keeps 
 the outer layer in a drier condition and it is due to this fact 
 
16 THE SKIN. 
 
 as well as to the application of friction that the constant 
 casting off of scales occurs. Ordinarily this process is 
 barely perceptible, but when the secretion of oil is not suffi- 
 cient to keep the skin moist, this scaliness becomes extreme- 
 ly objectionable and great flakes peel off continually, caus- 
 ing the face to look rough and coarse. Under the influence 
 of an irritant or where there is made an attempt to bleach 
 the skin, the same excessive flaking occurs until the appli- 
 cations cease. When the condition is extremely obstinate 
 constant inunctions of oil are necessary in order to keep the 
 skin in even a presentable condition. Hence the value of 
 the flesh or skin foods in cases of this description, as the 
 best of them are made from the finest oils and are readily 
 absorbed by the skin. 
 
 The mucous or malpighian layer is the deepest of the 
 outer layers of the skin and is situated directly above the 
 corium. Cones descending from this mucous layer are 
 met by the papillae extending up so that all the hollow 
 spaces are filled in. It is in this layer that the pigment cells 
 are found and it is in a desire to affect this supply of color- 
 ing matter that the various ointments for whitening the 
 skin are applied and rubbed in vigorously. The irritation 
 of the friction loosens the scarf skin and hastens the peeling, 
 while the manipulation assists in the process of absorption. 
 Should the irritation be prolonged greatly there is danger 
 of causing a greater deposit of pigment in this spot, instead 
 of removing the old discoloration. Carelessness in this 
 respect has ruined many faces, for the application of some 
 of the powerful bleaches has produced deep cauterizations 
 and thus left a permanent disfigurement, impossible to re- 
 move. No single treatment of the skin should ever be con- 
 tinued after redness or burning has been produced. The 
 presence of this coloring matter in the mucous layer has 
 
THE SKIN. 17 
 
 been made the subject of a curious experiment in which a bit 
 df skin from a white man was grafted upon a negro, with 
 the result that after a time the grafted portion became as 
 black as the rest of the body. 
 
 The corium, or "true skin," is made up of a dense, reg- 
 ular structure of elastic fibers. Under this is a layer of con- 
 nective tissue and here as well as in the cellular structure 
 is found the fatty tissue. The papillae projecting- from 
 this corium into the mucous layer each contain either the 
 daintiest capillary network or nervous apparatus. The 
 healthy hue of the skin is thus produced and maintained by 
 the tiny blood vessels, while when cold or under the in- 
 fluence of a great shock or terror, the nerve filaments pro- 
 duce the appearance known as "goose flesh. " 
 
 The layers of the skin as named are the most important, 
 though of course physiologists divide and subdivide them 
 still farther and explain many details which will neither 
 interest nor assist the ordinary student, so no mention is 
 made here of the distinctions drawn by some of these au- 
 thors. By studying the connection of the various layers it 
 will be seen that the outer layer should be nourished by the 
 proper action of the numerous glands in the lower sections, 
 while the coloring on the cheeks and face naturally comes 
 from the tiny blood capillaries projecting from the corium 
 into the mucous layer by means of the papillae. 
 
 The soft luster of the perfect skin is due to the proper 
 actions of the numerous glands as well as the presence 
 of sufficient subcutaneous fat. Hence any functional or lo- 
 cal disturbance will naturally affect the coloring and appear- 
 ance. In young and healthy people this luster is more pro- 
 nounced than in those who are older. In fact, one of the 
 first signs of approaching age is found in the disappearance 
 of this peculiar glow and a manifestation of a dry and illy- 
 
18 THE SKIN. 
 
 nourished condition of the skin as shown by numerous folds, 
 at first verv shallow, and afterward deepening into veritable 
 furrows that become rapidly more pronounced unless prop- 
 erly treated. 
 
 The normal skin should possess none of these lines un- 
 til the subject is so far advanced in years that age shows 
 plainly. To the observant student it is apparent that it is 
 more sensible to attempt to correct the various faults by a 
 judicious use of external applications as combined with 
 the necessary internal treatment; than it is to think that a 
 few doses of medicine by way of the mouth into the poor, 
 overworked stomach, can possibly reach every portion of 
 the body and correct every evil that exists. 
 
 There is a most peculiar impression among many peo- 
 ple that all skins are normal and that the only exceptions 
 to this rule are found in instances where cosmetics have 
 been applied. In reality, there are just as many exceptions 
 to the standard of health in skins as there are in bodies, and 
 it is quite as absurd to say that no skin needs treatment as it 
 is to say that no human being will ever need medical treat- 
 ment. 
 
 The fact that the skin needs constant care to keep it in 
 good condition can nowhere be better illustrated than in 
 mentioning the preservation of the flesh of the neck and 
 arms in almost every woman, whether any care has been 
 bestowed upon them or not. The constant friction from 
 the clothing keeps the pores freed from obstructions, while 
 protection from the sun and air preserves the whiteness. The 
 face, on the other hand, exposed to all changes of tempera- 
 ture, biting winds and burning sun, is naturally affected 
 greatly by this exposure. Discretion in caring for it will 
 to a great extent, remedy the dangers of necessary ex- 
 posure, and keep the complexion in good condition. 
 
THE SKIN. 19 
 
 It is hoped that these lines may be convincing enough to 
 prove to the majority of women the necessity of constant 
 
 care to keep the pores freed from obstructions,- the skin from 
 
 unnecessary defects, and the face free from disfiguring 
 wrinkles and the appearance of premature old age. 
 
 The treatments advocated in this hook have been prac- 
 ticed for many years with ahsolute success. The articles are 
 mentioned as used so that the beginner may know exactly 
 how to proceed, as vague directions but confuse the stu- 
 dent. The successful woman in business must depend upon 
 unguents of which she knows, if she expects to secure good 
 results. Emphasis has been placed upon the importance 
 of thoroughly cleansing the skin before work of any kind 
 is attempted, because the pores must be in a condition to 
 receive the material applied if the results are to be satis- 
 factory. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 WHY CREAMS ARE NECESSARY. 
 
 When any oil or combination of oils as found in creams 
 is applied to the skin it becomes soft, pliable and smooth. 
 It is readily absorbed into the superficial layer of the epi- 
 dermis and soon produces a clear appearance besides pre- 
 venting undue tension and removing any roughness that 
 exists. Methodical applications of ointments further their 
 absorption into the skin, and even cause them to appear in 
 the blood by way of the lymph vessels. Increase in weight, 
 the pleasing roundness and improved appearance are thus 
 explained as natural consequences after proper work. 
 
 As a protecting agent, a good cream is unexcelled, for it 
 forms a water-tight covering that serves to diminish the 
 moisture given off by the skin. Sebaceous secretions, fatty 
 acids of the sweat, and dirt may also be removed by an 
 application of oils, while the use of a thin coating is always 
 advisable in order to cause powder to adhere well. The 
 actual necessity for the use of creams can nowhere be bet- 
 ter illustrated than during a trip through the Yellowstone 
 Park. The only people who enjoy this outing are they who 
 realize that their safety and comfort consists in cleansing the 
 skin with a cream made for the purpose and then applying 
 more before dusting on the powder. Water and soap 
 should not be applied until the alkaline water has 
 given place to the ordinary variety. Even then, many ex- 
 perienced travelers hesitate about using much of it and 
 instead, stand loyally by their creams and powder. In fact, 
 there are skins so peculiarly sensitive that no water can be 
 used, and instead the surface must be cleansed with oil of 
 some kind. 
 
THE SKIN. 21 
 
 The use of seductive ointments and perfumed <>ils was so 
 very general among the ancients that there was a different 
 mixture advocated for ever) portion of the body, and as 
 a basis for man) of them the fat of an animal was sup- 
 posed to be necessary. For instance, the pomade used for 
 the feet and legs was invariably made from the animal who 
 possessed most strength and speed. That for the arms and 
 chest was termed Phoenician, while the most costly and deli- 
 cate oils were reserved for use on the face, neck and hands. 
 There is no doubt that the Greek and Roman women owed 
 the preservation of their beauty to this practice of anointing 
 after the bath, and it may well be urged on the women of 
 the present century as a very necessary process in the art 
 of beautifying, as well as a powerful aid in keeping the 
 skin of the body and face in an excellent condition. 
 
 The use of a good unguent or skin food should be rec- 
 ommended for the purpose of massaging not only the face 
 but also the entire body at least once a week after the 
 vapor or steam bath. A good cream is one that may be 
 readily absorbed by the pores, leaving the skin soft and pli- 
 able, but with no appearance of oiliness. Ointments are 
 made the means of treating many of the skin affections, as, 
 they may be absorbed so easily into the skin, that in this 
 manner much may be done by way of external application. 
 In any treatments of this kind, it is very necessary that the 
 pores be kept absolutely free from obstruction, so that the 
 oils may be able to penetrate readily. 
 
 The knowledge of just what treatment each skin needs 
 is one possessed only by the experienced worker. In many 
 instances there must be a combination of remedies skillfully 
 applied to counteract the various peculiar conditions, and in 
 all cases much perseverance must exist. Many are troubled 
 with abnormally dry skins and with freckles also. The 
 
22 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 treatment in this instance must be so directed that the de- 
 mand for a nourishing oil may be supplied, while also a 
 penetrating remedy may be used in order to affect the ab- 
 normal amount of coloring matter in the mucous layer of 
 the skin. In the work of treating blackheads, in which 
 there is an excessive secretion of oil, there must be oil used 
 to penetrate the glands and stimulate them, and the de- 
 mand for an astringent is also to be considered. So the 
 peculiarities of each individual must be studied and treated. 
 In every instance the use of oils as combined in creams is 
 a necessity. 
 
 Although all intelligent workers realize and can explain 
 to their patrons the reasons for applying ointments, there 
 are many ignorant though positive souls who attempt to 
 discredit the efficiency of work of this kind by asserting that 
 the use of creams will make the hair grow. If this were 
 only true, one can well imagine the joy that would be 
 speedily felt in the ranks of bald-headed men. The fortu- 
 nate manufacturer of such a cream would immediately be- 
 come famous as well as rich and would be regarded as a 
 public benefactor. Unfortunately at the risk of disappoint- 
 ing many, one must be truthful enough to assert that no 
 ordinary cream will cause the growth of hair. 
 
 All skins are covered with the soft wool hair or lanugo. 
 In many instances as people grow older this growth be- 
 comes more apparent. Close observation in hundreds of 
 cases has failed to reveal any connection between the ap- 
 pearance of hair and the use of creams. Very frequently, 
 in fact in nearly all cases, this abnormal growth appears 
 also on the arms and legs showing that it is not confined to 
 the face alone. Fully one-half of the worst cases the author 
 has ever seen were found to be guiltless of ever applying 
 any kind of a creme to the skin, while the remainder de- 
 
THE SKIN. 28 
 
 clared that they were convinced that there would be no con 
 nection between the use ni a good creme and the growth of 
 
 hair. 
 
 There has been an effort during the past few years on 
 the part o\ unscrupulous or ignorant manufacturers to pro- 
 duce articles that shall take the place of substances con- 
 taining oil, and many high-priced and strongly scented con- 
 coctions have been advertised for the purpose of massage, 
 having for their chief recommendation the absence of any- 
 thing like an oil or fat. This, in itself, should be enough to 
 keep any intelligent woman from an attempt to use the 
 articles, for every student of physiology should know from 
 the nature of the skin that it must have oil of some kind 
 applied if it is to be kept in good condition. That much- 
 used term, "skin food," is really appropriate for how many 
 women who have been withered and faded and haggard, 
 years before their time, have had the skin so fed and nour- 
 ished that they have looked years younger after only a week 
 or so of proper treatment. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE MANUFACTURE OF CREAMS. 
 
 The work of combining the various oils into odorous 
 mixtures is one that appeals naturally to any woman. She 
 who has not this inclination to don a big apron, and stir 
 the foamy substance that is to make her far more attractive, 
 must have either a heart of adamant or be utterly lacking in 
 either imagination or sentiment. Few women ever grow 
 so old or become so dead to their sense of beauty that they 
 can honestly deny all interest in work of this character. 
 And, as we all love to see flowers instead of weeds, well- 
 kept houses rather than ruined huts, so, too, a well-groomed 
 woman with a complexion free from defects will ever be 
 more attractive than one who is lined and yellow from 
 sheer neglect. 
 
 The necessity for the use of creams has been so well 
 established that it is useless to add more on the subject, 
 but the process of making them may well need a few lines of 
 explanation. This fascinating art is not without its draw- 
 backs, chief among which is the very serious one that con- 
 fronts most amateurs — lack of sufficient knowledge. Then, 
 too, the work is not a cheap amusement, for by the time the 
 various utensils necessary have been collected, and the nu- 
 merous ingredients have been purchased, the outlay is far in 
 excess of the cost of the purchased articles, while in addi- 
 tion there is always a possibility that the results may not be 
 good. Of course, it is absolutely hopeless for any one un- 
 trained in the work to attempt the composition of any of 
 the more complicated recipes, as both the equipment and the 
 materials would involve too great an outlay, to say nothing 
 of the necessity for experience in the work. Hence, in the 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 recipes that follow care has been taken to explain carefully 
 
 each step, as well as to select only those that can be prepared 
 
 with a comparatively certain degree of success. 
 
 A good almond oil is the basis of nearly every fine prep- 
 aration. Of course every druggist keeps this oil, but every 
 druggist does not keep the finest variety, as there is not 
 enough demand to warrant it. Thus the woman who 
 wishes to do good work will be under the necessity of pur- 
 chasing her oil in the twenty-five-pound cans direct from 
 the importers or large drug houses if she wishes to be sure 
 of the quality. Creams made from any nut oils will be- 
 come rancid under the influence of intense or prolonged 
 heat, and creams made from inferior qualities of oils be- 
 come rancid almost immediately, while in addition to this 
 unpleasant property they also irritate the skin greatly. All 
 creams are best made in small quantities and should, when 
 not in use, be kept in a cool place with the covers of the 
 jar well fastened down. 
 
 In purchasing ingredients care should be exercised to 
 see that they are the best obtainable. A pure almond oil 
 will be of a delicate straw color, clear as crystal, and with 
 none of that strong odor so invariably associated with the 
 ordinary oils. Lanolin is best purchased in pound packages 
 after it has been subjected to the refining process. It has 
 always a peculiar, sticky appearance and possesses a mildly 
 distasteful and extremely distinctive scent. The finest wax 
 is nearly white, not yellow, and comes in small round cakes, 
 while the best spermaceti is usually found in long, white 
 glistening cakes. Cocoanut oil when pure and fresh looks 
 like a ball of snow pudding, though of course the strong 
 odor is never absent. Although other oils are used, the 
 three mentioned are those most generally employed and also 
 most beneficial in effect. 
 
26 THE SKIN. 
 
 Before attempting to make any creams an investment 
 in an enameled water boiler is absolutely necessary. This 
 should be used for nothing but work of this kind, and with it 
 should come one or two long-handled granite spoons for 
 stirring the oils. In making the cream, care should be ob- 
 served in regard to the thorough melting of the white wax, 
 spermaceti and other ingredients before the rose water is 
 added. In order to have the mixtures appear the best, they 
 should be w r ell beaten from the time they are taken from the 
 fire until they are cool enough to perfume. 
 
 Cream Celeste is a very good skin food when made of 
 the finest materials. It is prepared as follows : 
 
 Almond oil , 8 § 
 
 Spermaceti 2 § 
 
 White wax 1 5 
 
 Honey 15 
 
 Rose water 2 § 
 
 Borax 1 3 
 
 Rose geranium oil — sufficient to perfume. The oils may 
 be melted together, and then the honey added and stirred in 
 well. Last of all, the rose water, in which has been dis- 
 solved one dram of borax. Enough of the oil of rose 
 geranium to thoroughly perfume the mixture may be used 
 as soon as it is cool. 
 
 Almonda is the friend of the freckled maiden, though 
 the action is so mild that she becomes a little discouraged 
 at times, for it will not remake her instantly. Still she must 
 reflect that no one inexperienced in the art should be in- 
 trusted with the use of chemicals that may be potent alike 
 for good or evil, depending upon the discretion with which 
 they are vised. This creme should be applied at night after 
 washing the face with soap and warm water. It is not so 
 
THE SKIN. 21 
 
 penetrating as the Whitening Creme spoken of elsewhere, 
 but has been used with ver) good results: 
 
 Almond oil 6 § 
 
 1 *anolin i f } 
 
 Spermaceti 25 
 
 ( ocoanut oil 15 
 
 While wax I g 
 
 White precipitate 1 3 
 
 Oil bitter almonds I 3 
 
 Melt the oils together and then add the white precipi- 
 tate first, mixed with one-half ounce of alcohol. Perfume 
 with oil of bitter almonds. 
 
 Delight of the Harem sounds quite oriental enough 
 to enable one to conjure up a vision of some dusky beauty, 
 carefully applying this seductive ointment in the hope of 
 making her warm olive skin look a deadly white. This 
 cream is really used for whitening the skin of the neck and 
 arms temporarily, and is especially useful for the purpose 
 of disguising a bad skin in the evening. It should not be 
 used on the face, as it is too much of an astringent. 
 
 Almond oil 6 § 
 
 White wax I % 
 
 Spermaceti 1% 
 
 Paraffin 15 
 
 Oxide of zinc 1 § 
 
 Orange blossom oil 20 drops 
 
 In this preparation the oxide of zinc should be well 
 sifted through bolting cloth before mixing in with the oils, 
 as otherwise the cream may appear a little gritty. The 
 effect of applying this ointment is most pleasing and it is 
 doubtless to some preparation of this kind that the profes- 
 sional beauties owe their snowy arms and shoulders. 
 
 The recipes which follow for the use of creams made 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 of strawberry and of cucumber juice are said to be highly 
 beneficial. The chief objection to the use of these articles 
 is the fact that they require more time in making and are, 
 ►urse, impossible to obtain at certain seasons of the 
 year, for it is said that no hot-house vegetable will do for 
 this purpose. 
 
 Straw berry Cream is much used to remove tan or dis- 
 colorations that are not too pronounced. It is made in this 
 manner : 
 
 Almond oil ., 8 § 
 
 Strawberries I qt 
 
 Allow the strawberries to simmer in the hot oil for three 
 or four hours, until the greater part of the juice is extracted, 
 and then strain through a cheesecloth bag without using any 
 pressure. Proceed as follows, using for six ounces of the 
 strained liquid these ingredients: 
 
 Strained liquid 6 § 
 
 Lanolin 2 § 
 
 Spermaceti 2 § 
 
 White wax I § 
 
 Tinct. benzoin I 3 
 
 Bals. Peru I 3 
 
 Oil Neroli i 3 
 
 Add the balsam of Peru to the hot oils and then remove 
 from the fire and stir, beating in the tincture of benzoin 
 and adding perfumed oil last of all. 
 
 Strawberry Paste. — In connection with the use of this 
 cream the strawberry paste has also been used to some ex- 
 tent. It is easily made and may better be given here, as the 
 two are so closely associated: 
 
 Fresh strawberries i lb 
 
 Gum tragacanth y 2 § 
 
 Orris powder I § 
 
THE SKIN. 29 
 
 Almond meal i g 
 
 Juice of lemons 3 5 
 
 Rose water l / 2 pt 
 
 Dissolve the tragacanth in sufficient rose water to form 
 a mucilage, and then crush the strawberries and mix before 
 straining. Add the orris root and almond meal and last of 
 all the lemon juice. Apply in the form of a thin paste at 
 night and remove in the morning, using the cream imme- 
 diately afterward and dusting on powder before exposure 
 to the air. 
 
 Cucumber Cream is prepared in much the same \\a\ , 
 using the same amount of oil and cutting in it as soon as 
 warm three good-sized cucumbers which have not been 
 peeled : 
 
 Almond oil 8 5 
 
 Cucumbers 3 
 
 Heat well for three or four hours and then strain through 
 cheesecloth, adding the following ingredients : 
 
 Strained liquid 6 § 
 
 Paraffin 25 
 
 White wax 1 o 
 
 Cocoanut oil 2 5 
 
 Oil of Neroli 1 o 
 
 A cream that may be used for eruptions that occur so 
 frequently during the summer months is prepared in this 
 manner : 
 
 Lanolin 25 
 
 Cocoanut oil 4 .1 
 
 Paraffin 1 1 
 
 White wax I 5 
 
 Carbolic acid x 3 
 
 In this cream the oils are melted and the acid added 
 when the mixture is cool. It is best if applied after washing 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 the face well with a mild soap and warm water, just before 
 retiring at night. 
 
 Another cream most popular with those who suffer from 
 prickly heat or the tiny red pimple that appears on the arms 
 and shoulders is made by using witch hazel instead of rose 
 water, the other ingredients being practically the same as 
 
 those used in any cold cream: 
 
 Witch hazel 3 5 
 
 Lanolin 2 5 
 
 Almond oil 4 o 
 
 White wax I o 
 
 Spermaceti 2 § 
 
 Skin Food. — For those who find glycerine agrees with 
 the skin the following recipe for a skin food will be most 
 acceptable, as in this formula it appears to good advantage : 
 
 Sweet almond oil 4 3 
 
 Spermaceti 25 
 
 White wax 1 § 
 
 Glycerine 2 § 
 
 Powdered borax 1 3 
 
 Rose water 2 § 
 
 Oil rose 10 drops 
 
 Melt the oils together and dissolve the borax in the rose 
 water and glycerine. Add the other ingredients, beating 
 constantly until cold. Perfume last of all. 
 
 The list of these pleasing and useful cosmetics is indeed 
 a long one and might be continued indefinitely were it not 
 decidedly impracticable for the ordinary amateur to indulge 
 in the pleasing though expensive pastime of making creams. 
 Why it is, no one knows, but it is surely a fact that while 
 women delight to make these cosmetics, they seldom have 
 any faith in the efficacy of anything they can prepare, and 
 
THE SKIN. 31 
 
 it is probably due to this as much as anything else that so 
 few women in business now manufacture their own cos- 
 metics. 
 
 Buying any of the ingredients in a small way is ex- 
 tremely expensive, while the work of concocting the various 
 articles requires much time as well as a special training. 
 No one preparation can ever be used successfully for all 
 defects, and it requires much knowledge to enable a masseuse 
 to judge the requirements of each skin, as well as to know 
 the best method of treating it. All work to be beneficial 
 must be performed methodically and intelligently, and this 
 applies especially to the use of the various remedies indica- 
 ted in treatment of the ordinarv skin affections. 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 WRINKLES AND WHAT CAUSES THEM. 
 
 Although the word wrinkle is unavoidably associated 
 
 with the thought of age, in reality many wrinkles have little 
 
 connection with the age of the person and are caused by the 
 
 carelessness of the subject rather than by the weight of 
 
 irs. 
 
 Habit lines form early in life, and among those com- 
 monly observed, some of which serve to alter the most 
 winning face into one far more prepossessing, may be men- 
 tioned the creases caused by elevating the eyebrows con- 
 stantly while conversing. Lines of this kind are frequently 
 deep and obstinate before the age of twenty has been 
 reached. The straight line found running from the root of 
 the nose up into the forehead, giving to the face a surly, 
 disagreeable expression, is made by scowling or squinting 
 when reading, or inspecting any object that requires close 
 scrutiny. The appearance of these lines in exactly the same 
 portions of the face in every member of a family from one 
 generation to another undoubtedly points to the influence 
 of heredity. It also indicates the existence of gross care- 
 lessness, for by a little effort toward muscle control, it will 
 soon be found that any of these habits may be cured, even 
 if every member of the family for the past seven hundred 
 years has insisted upon having them. 
 
 Cosmetics containing harmful metallic astringents may 
 also be mentioned as a cause of the appearance of deep 
 repulsive lines, occurring particularly in the cheeks, and 
 generally very difficult to remove. Wrinkles of this kind 
 are especially apt to cause an appearance of extreme age, 
 
THE SKIN. 38 
 
 even though the subject is a young person, for not only are 
 the folds deep, but the surrounding flesh, as well, seems 
 to be dry and lifeless. 
 
 Ill health is another factor in causing lines to appear, 
 and in most instances of this kind the skin seems poorly 
 nourished as well, while the lines appear by the dozen, cross- 
 ing and recrossing the flesh until the face looks like a bit 
 of patchwork. When the skin has the feeling of parch- 
 ment, the lines are apt to be particularly hard to erase, and 
 constant inunctions of oil are necessary to make the com- 
 plexion even presentable. 
 
 Mechanical appliances are responsible for much trouble, 
 and the use of the face steamer may be mentioned as being 
 particularly harmful. The intense heat extracts the fat 
 from the tissues and in time produces a flabby condition of 
 the skin. The pores become large and the wrinkles form 
 quickly. Another potent cause of trouble in this respect, 
 may be found in the small glass arrangement provided with 
 a rubber bulb. By placing the glass upon the face and 
 compressing the bulb, the flesh is drawn into the glass by 
 suction. True, the blood rushes to the surface, and the skin 
 becomes uniformly pink, but the mischief comes from the 
 undue stretching that assists in producing fresh lines in- 
 stead of removing the old ones. 
 
 Strongly alkaline washes and bleaches, undiluted alcohol, 
 too much benzoin, and other similar preparations have an 
 intensely drying effect upon the skin, and make much mis- 
 chief by affecting the supply of oil necessary to a healthful 
 condition. 
 
 Another active factor in assisting wrinkles to appear 
 may be found in nearly every bedroom. If the light streams 
 directly from the windows toward the bed in such a man- 
 ner that the sun's rays can penetrate through the crevices 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 of the shades or around the edges,, falling directly upon the 
 the lines about the eyes and forehead will be found 
 unusually deep. This is due to the unconscious contraction 
 oi the brows, causing the wrinkles to multiply rapidly, and 
 may easily be avoided by either changing the position of the 
 bed, hanging heavy curtains over the windows, or by using 
 the foot of the bed in place of the head so that the sleeper 
 will not face the light. 
 
 Lines oi age are those that will come to every face in 
 the course of time, for no power has been found as yet that 
 avail in persuading Time to move less rapidly. The 
 appearance of the unwelcome guests that mark the gather- 
 ing year- can therefore be treated only as a matter of course, 
 at the same time making an effort to correct any faulty 
 condition of the skin that may aid them in obtaining a 
 stronger hold. Patient labor will do wonders toward making 
 the traces less apparent, and if the skin is skillfully 
 ! for. lines may not appear for many years. Of course, 
 nu face could be interesting without traces of expression, 
 and the woman of a happy disposition who continually 
 smiles whether at trouble or joy wall invariably have a face 
 that will indicate this tendency, while the woman who is a 
 victim of melancholia and allows her mood to govern her 
 life will just as positively exhibit to the world lines that 
 betray her weakness. So the observant student who has 
 cultivated the habit of studying human nature will be able to 
 tell much of a woman's life by the appearance of her face, 
 unless she has trained herself into exhibiting no emotion 
 at any time. 
 
 Wrinkles that form later in life and that so clearly dis- 
 these secrets are caused by the loosening of the con- 
 nections of the skin, the disappearance of the subcutaneous 
 iat, and the connective tissue, and the flattening of the tiny 
 
NIK SKIN 35 
 
 papilhc. Hence the only method thai will retard this proc- 
 ess is that which consists in gently hut thoroughly cleansing 
 
 the skin in such a manner that the pores may be thor- 
 oughly opened and the oil necessary to the nourishment of 
 the tissues may he readily absorbed. This process of absorp- 
 tion must he assisted by manipulation or friction conducted 
 by means of the finger massage. The circulation should be 
 brought into action by exercise and by the use of electricity 
 when necessary. The application of creams and nourish- 
 ing foods should be made at frequent intervals in a system- 
 atic manner in order to replace the constant waste, while 
 baths and correct massage will so tone and strengthen the 
 muscles that the skin will respond readily to the work indi- 
 cated. In the treatment of wrinkles emphasis should ever 
 be placed on the use of gentle rather than forcible efforts 
 to remove them, and only the most scientific method should 
 be employed in this work. By following instructions and 
 observing the directions indicated in the illustrations the 
 work may be done most successfully. 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 WHY WE MASSAGE. 
 
 Massage is now fully recognized as an important factor 
 in the treatment of many skin affections. It is not only em- 
 ployed to retard the appearance of age, but is also valuable 
 as an assistant in promoting the absorption of the various 
 ointments used in the many skin affections. In fact, so great 
 has been the progress of information regarding the best 
 methods of treating the skin that one rarely sees an "old 
 woman" now. Judging from the presence of children, and 
 grandchildren, a woman will be known to have passed a 
 certain age, but aside from this actual knowledge, her ap- 
 pearance will positively give no suggestion of her real years. 
 
 In reality massage bears to the face the same relations 
 that careful cleansing does to the gowns that simply must 
 last a certain length of time. Every woman knows that 
 attention of this kind is necessary if she would keep her 
 wardrobe in good condition, and in time all women will be 
 convinced that they owe themselves at least as much atten- 
 tion as they bestow upon their clothing. 
 
 The best manipulation is, of course, done by another per- 
 son. Not only because the lines can be more easily coaxed 
 into submission by the trained fingers, but also because when 
 one leaves the responsibility of the work to another, there 
 is a feeling of rest and contentment and relaxation pos- 
 sible that may be obtained in no other way. The ideal 
 
 -euse is never particularly talkative when giving her 
 treatments. She realizes that in this bustling age there is 
 a demand for repose and so she deftly strokes the deep 
 lines, kneads the flabby muscles, and pats the flesh with a 
 
THE SKIN. 37 
 
 swiftness and ease that soothes the subject into a half-hyp- 
 notic mood of perfect contentment. Treatments of this 
 kind are not only valuable for the physical improvement 
 they impart, but also because they are positively necessary 
 to the well-being of the woman who will not take rest 
 in any other way. 
 
 Massage treatments should be taken twice a week when 
 possible. If the services of the professional cannot be ob- 
 tained, systematic work must be done at home. At least 
 five minutes should be spent each night in rubbing the lines, 
 and if by late hours and suppers the night has been sleep- 
 less, or not particularly restful, cold water dashed on to the 
 face in the morning, followed by more rubbing, will make 
 the face look and feel better all day. Just a few moments 
 of attention each day will serve to achieve excellent results. 
 
 A skin food or creme is always used in connection with 
 the massage treatment, not only because the materials will 
 be absorbed into the skin, but also to aid the fingers in the 
 work, as otherwise the skin would become red and irrita- 
 ted by the constant friction. In this climate, with its varia- 
 tions of heat and cold, every woman who wishes to appear 
 well must positively pin her faith to the use of prepara- 
 tions of this kind. Nature may have intended all people 
 to have beautiful complexions, but she also planned at the 
 same time many other things, and as lives are lived with- 
 out any reference to her suggestions excepting to com- 
 plain because she has not done more, it is rather foolish to 
 blame her for all the troubles that most of us possess. 
 
 The country maid is often quoted as an example of 
 health and beauty, but alas ! her comeliness is not permanent, 
 and at thirty the buxom lass has lost her roses and most of 
 her teeth. The cheeks are hollow, the forehead lined. 
 Streaks of brown invade the tan and make the complexion 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 hopeless, while round shoulders aid to make her look every 
 ifty. ' The worst of the matter is, she feels it, too, 
 and is assured that the best years of her life have passed, 
 while her city sister of the same age blooms out like a 
 ling that life is just commencing to be of the most 
 inter* 
 
 Physiologists tell us that the majority of people are not 
 ctly developed until they have passed twenty-eight 
 Some of the muscles are only then perfectly capable 
 of doing the work required "of them. If this is true, the 
 period of maturity may well be advanced another ten years 
 and fifty should find a woman at her best. The majority 
 of intelligent women are at their best at this age, but some 
 of them who have not progressed so rapidly still feel du- 
 bious of the propriety of making an effort to appear youth- 
 ful and look forward with dread to an inefficient and unen- 
 joyable old age. 
 
 However, each day brings more recruits to the ranks of 
 the hopeful, and as information becomes disseminated widely 
 more women will see in the gathering years the time when 
 perfected mentally, and in good condition physically, they 
 can really accomplish great things. 
 
 Massage is naturally the one great factor in producing 
 the best results in work of this kind, and of all forms of 
 massage, nothing can give the benefit that the manipulations 
 of the finger-tips bestow. Many devices have been invented 
 and advocated. Many are excellent when combined with 
 the original form, but all must be considered subservient to 
 the soft yet forcible touch bestowed by the fingers of the 
 good masseuse. 
 
 The cleansing process advocated as a necessary part of 
 every treatment is based upon the requirements of the. skin. 
 The use of tiny mallets and a small roller are indeed valu- 
 
THE SKIN. 39 
 
 able as adjuncts to the best work, but cannot be regarded in 
 any other light, All work must emphatically be well per- 
 formed if the results are to be good. 
 
 HOW TO PREPARE THE FACE FOR MASSAGE. 
 
 One of the greatest detriments to successful work is the 
 fact that cremes are rubbed into skins not properly prepared 
 to receive them. The already obstructed pores cannot ab- 
 sorb the unguents unless some cleansing process is at- 
 tempted. Hence the best masseuse will always carefully 
 cleanse the skin before giving a treatment. To do this, 
 she will use the automatic or water massage, because the 
 tiny cup-shaped affair is so constructed that it cannot stretch 
 the skin, although it does by means of suction hold it to 
 the rim of the tiny cup while the water passing over it 
 gently lifts the flesh from its accustomed grooves, thor- 
 oughly cleanses the pores, and stimulates the glands to 
 renewed effort. 
 
 In order to assist in this cleansing process, the face 
 should first be coated well with some cleansing cream such 
 as the lettuce. After a few moments this may be removed 
 by the aid of a bit of cotton or a soft towel, leaving just 
 enough of the oil on the face to allow the cup to move 
 easily over the surface. Then the rubber bag or enameled 
 supply can may be filled with warm water, to which one- 
 half of a cup of saturated solution of borax has been added 
 to three quarts of water. Borax is used in this instance 
 because it is one of the best cosmetic agents, is absolutely 
 harmless, and has a mildly cleansing action on the skin, 
 thus making an efficient aid to the water massage. Illus- 
 tration (Figure i) plainly indicates the method of using 
 the massage. 
 
 The tiny cup should always be sterilized thoroughly be- 
 
Figure 1. 
 Using the Water Massage. 
 
THE SKIN. II 
 
 fore using, and a small wire inserted and pulled through 
 both the inlet and outlet tubes to see that they are per- 
 fectly clean from any obstruction. After the bag has been 
 hung at least six feet from the floor and the end of the 
 outlet tube has been immersed in water so that the suction 
 will be complete, a little water should run through the cup 
 into the vessel to show that the action is perfect. Then it 
 may be pressed gently to the face, the cut-off on the tube 
 unclasped, and as soon as the suction is well established the 
 work of massaging is commenced by moving the cup gently 
 over the face as shown in Figure i. The directions taken 
 in the use of finger massage may to a certain extent be 
 imitated in the use of the bag. The suction should be 
 sufficient to keep the cup attached gently to the face with 
 no especial pressure excepting over the forehead, and up 
 each side of the nose where some water may be spilled until 
 practice has made perfect. If one is desirous of using 
 greater suction on some parts of the face this may be 
 arranged by hanging the bag higher, and for this reason 
 it is always well to have the height at which the bag is 
 hung regulated by a pulley. It may then be raised or low- 
 ered as desired with little effort. Of course this treatment 
 of the face should also include the neck, as otherwise the 
 difference in color will be too apparent. 
 
 As soon as the warm water has been exhausted the 
 face should be dried by patting with a soft towel, and a 
 skin food applied in ord^r to facilitate the work of finger 
 massage. In using anything of this kind on the face, care 
 must be taken to avoid applying too much, as the fingers 
 will slip, instead of maintaining their hold and the massage 
 cannot be administered properly. 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 HOW TO MASSAGE. 
 
 The work of massaging the face is not one that can be 
 learned in two or three lessons or by means of reading a 
 few lines on the subject. It is a study that takes both time 
 and practice. Results will be excellent in all cases that are 
 studied and worked upon carefully, but unless the work is 
 done in this manner nothing worth while can be accom- 
 plished. 
 
 The system of massage advocated in this book is one 
 that is based not on the pet ideas of one or two people, 
 but on the strong foundation of the requirements of the skin 
 as known from the study of physiology and anatomy. Not 
 only the muscles have been considered, but the positions 
 of the nerves and blood vessels have also been a matter of 
 much study and as a consequence the method illustrated, 
 when properly carried out, will indeed do much for the 
 patient. The illustrations not only indicate from the posi- 
 tion of the arrows just what direction the manipulations 
 arc to take, but also show just when the rotary motion 
 is of most benefit, by the presence of the spiral. Most 
 of the work should be done with the soft tips of the two 
 first fingers excepting when in massage of the cheeks or 
 neck or chin the flat fingers of the hand are indicated. 
 
 In this as in other work the hackneyed phrase may be 
 well repeated that a "masseuse is born, not made." This 
 need not deter others from learning the work and doing 
 £-ood work, but one must also remember that in the prac- 
 tice of massage as in other occupations demanding an inti- 
 mate knowledge of human nature, the question of person- 
 
i- igure -. 
 Erasing the Long Line 
 
il THE SKIN. 
 
 ality must enter. The woman who can infuse her patients 
 with a belief in her power to aid them does a double 
 for she also rests and soothes them. The work that 
 counts is that methodically and carefully performed with 
 no noise or bustle, and with an absolute devotion to the 
 manner of treatment. 
 
 Massage is to the face what careful pressing is to a 
 gown. Both processes prolong the appearance of fresh- 
 far beyond the period generally allowed. The man- 
 ner of performing the work is naturally of much impor- 
 tance and the most successful masseuse is she who is a 
 student, ever alert to grasp new facts and to apply the 
 results of her knowledge and experience when the occasion 
 presents itself. 
 
 The lines on the forehead are generally rather obstinate 
 to erase, as in the majority of people the habit of raising 
 the brows continually while conversing or of squinting the 
 while attempting to do fine work has made the straight 
 creases between the eyes and the horizontal folds extremely 
 deep. In illustration (Figure 2) the proper motion for 
 erasing the long lines is seen, and the tips of the two first 
 ringers are used for this purpose, pressing gently but firmly 
 on the flesh. The fingers of one hand move down toward 
 the brow, while those of the other move toward the fore- 
 head, thus passing and repassing continually while the proc- 
 ess is continued. After a few moments' work the effect 
 will be seen to be remarkably pleasing, as even the deepest 
 lines yield to the gentle pressure. 
 
 The vertical lines between the eyes are best rubbed as 
 indicatd in Figure 4, in a rotary motion made by pressing 
 the fingers firmly upon the flesh and then describing small 
 circles. In this work only the fingers of one hand may be 
 used for the massage, though the two first fingers of the 
 
Figure 3. 
 The Linus about the K\ i 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 other may be used for keeping the flesh in place. When 
 these lines show a tendency to spring back into place almost 
 immediately, it is well to smooth out the forehead until it 
 Free from lines and then paste bits of court plaster across 
 the lines in such a manner that they cannot form again. 
 This little precaution is extremely valuable and when ap- 
 plied during the first part of the treatment often assists in 
 the work of making the face appear better. The fact that 
 the court plaster prevents contraction of the brows reminds 
 the patient that the habit may be broken by the exercise 
 of a little effort. 
 
 The lines radiating from the eyes are apt to form the 
 earliest of any, and often the deepest and most difficult 
 are indicative of nothing more than an extremely merry 
 disposition. Women who have much trouble, physical or 
 mental, are also apt to have deep lines, while those with 
 weak eyes are especially afflicted. In Figure 3 the correct 
 motion for pressing out these lines is indicated. The flesh is 
 held between the thumb and forefinger of the one hand 
 firmly while the two first fingers of the other are used to 
 rub down across the lines, and in a gentle rotary motion 
 beneath the eyes. Figure 5 shows the manner in which 
 the eyelid is to be rubbed, and Figure 4 indicates the rotary 
 motion used directly below the eye. This work about the 
 eyes is most particular and must be carried on very gently 
 indeed. Where there is much bagginess and puffiness be- 
 neath the eyes there should be a great deal of the cold 
 water used in the water massage treatment, and the rotary 
 motion should be very light, leaving most of the work to 
 be done by the mallets for the gentle tapping motion stim- 
 ulates without stretching or pulling. The massage from 
 the corners of the eye may be continued up to the temples, 
 rubbing as indicated in Figure 4. 
 
Figure 1. 
 Massage the Rotary Motion. 
 
48 THE SKIN. 
 
 The nose may be massaged as indicated in Figures 4 
 and 5. In this work the motion may be continued down 
 from the space between the eyes across the tiny lines that 
 sometimes form each side of the nose. From the bridge 
 down to each nostril the pressure may be firm or light, 
 according to the results desired. People with thick nostrils 
 generally desire to have them made as unobtrusive as pos- 
 sible, and the work of massage will accomplish a great deal 
 in so affecting the cartilages that the thick appearance may 
 be effectively subdued. 
 
 The cheeks, as indicated by the arrows, are best treated 
 by rubbing in the manner shown from the center of the 
 face outward. For this work it is well to use the flat portion 
 of the hands and in rubbing, watch carefully to see that no 
 new lines are rubbed in around the eyes or temples. The 
 deep lines running from the corners of the mouth to the 
 nose may be rapidly rubbed out by this method. In Figure 
 4 the arrows indicate that attention should also be directed 
 to rubbing the flesh below and directly in front of the ears 
 also, as small lines forming there soon develop into per- 
 fect furrows unless promptly discouraged. 
 
 The mouth is peculiarly difficult to manipulate, both be- 
 cause the lines about it are apt to be sharply defined, and 
 also because the fingers are apt to slip away from the yield- 
 ing surface. In Figure 5 the best method is illustrated. 
 The forefinger is placed in the center of the circle and the 
 thumb and second fingers are placed at the corner of the 
 mouth and then drawn slowly toward the center. This may 
 need to be repeated a number of times before the exact mo- 
 tion is acquired, as the flesh is so flexible. The lines are 
 little half circles shaped thus ( ) at the corners of the 
 mouth and are best obliterated by rubbing from the mouth 
 in the direction indicated by the arrows. 
 
Figure -V 
 Massage of the Eyelid. 
 
50 THE SKIN. 
 
 The chin is massaged as shown in Figure 4, the circular 
 motion may be done by the two first fingers or else the 
 chin may be grasped firmly in the hand and a twisting mo- 
 tion from side to side given. The flabby flesh or baggy 
 portion directly beneath the chin may be made much less 
 conspicuous by using the proper motions very frequently. 
 As indicated, the stroking is to be done from the center 
 down toward the neck. This work can also be aided 
 greatly by the use of the mallets, the electric vibratile, and 
 much cold water in giving the water massage. The flesh 
 will become firm and solid and the tendency to flabbiness will 
 disappear gradually under treatment. 
 
 The neck may be rubbed, as shown in Figure 6, by using 
 the four fingers held flatly on the flesh and drawing them 
 back from the center always. Never attempt to rub the 
 neck up and down at the sides, but always in the same 
 direction toward the back. The deep lines that form back 
 ni the ears and run toward the front may be easily kept 
 in suggestion by directing much attention to this spot in 
 the. use of the water massage. When the neck is at all 
 discolored, as after the use of high or stiff collars the mas- 
 sage may be given with the whitening creme, thus accom- 
 plishing two things at the same time in the way of bleaching 
 and removing lines. 
 
 The finger massage finished, the next step is to once 
 more fill the bag, this time with cold water, to which half 
 a cup of saturated solution of alum has been added. The 
 use of this cold water produces a glow and a feeling of ex- 
 hilaration hard to describe, but pleasant as well as beneficial 
 \perience, restoring tone and firmness to the skin. The 
 u>e of the cold water is especially to be recommended on 
 and about the eyes and forehead, as well as on the sides of 
 the face near the temples. When the supply has been ex- 
 
Figure 6. 
 Massage of the Neck. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 hausted the face is dried by softly patting it with a fine towel 
 and the astringent creme applied before commencing the 
 mallet treatment. 
 
 The astringent is best applied a little at a time — that is, it 
 is advisable to apply it first to one side of the face and 
 then to the other, rather than to cover the entire face at 
 once. Just enough is used to cover the face and then the 
 treatment commences as shown in Figure 7. Some opera- 
 tors prefer keeping one mallet stationary while tapping with 
 the other. Others declare it is best to use both at the same 
 time. In actual practice, experience shows that both meth- 
 ods give good results. The tapping may be given more 
 vigorously on the cheeks and beneath the chin, while about 
 the eyes and on the forehead the lightest motions must be 
 used. This work does much to keep the flesh firm, and 
 though important as part of the treatment, need not con- 
 sume more than four to six minutes. After it is finished 
 the fingers should be rubbed carefully over the face and all 
 suprefluous creme removed by the use of a bit of cotton. 
 Powder should be dusted on as a protection from the air. 
 
 If the face massaged is that of an elderly woman, or if 
 the skin seems poorly nourished, the use of electricity is 
 advisable in place of the mallets. For this purpose the 
 current may be used immediately after the supply of cold 
 water has been exhausted, and may be administered through 
 the finger-tips as illustrated, or better still, by means of the 
 vibratile. The face should not be treated by electricity for 
 longer than ten minutes and the skin should be powdered 
 as usual after the treatment is finished. Very severe cases 
 where the lines are unusually deep and the skin, exception- 
 ally dry in appearance, should be treated daily if possible, 
 and a sensible diet, with sufficient exercise, recommended. 
 Improvement is absolutely certain, though, of course, it will 
 
Figure 7. 
 Massage with Use of the Mallet. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 not be as rapid in older women as in younger ones. The 
 ssarj point is persistence, and if the woman troubled 
 with linos is also endowed with a will, the work will as- 
 suredly do all that can be wished. 
 
CHAPTER VII. 
 
 BLACKHEADS, N M PLES AM) M M.i \. 
 
 One of the mosl difficult tasks assigned to the masseuse 
 is the treatment of the loathsome pimple and blackhead 
 cases so extremely common among young people of both 
 
 sexes. The demand for this work has never hern so great 
 as it is at the present time, for it is only within the past few 
 years that people have realized that affections of this kind 
 could be termed skin diseases rather than blood disorder.-. 
 Still notwithstanding the interest manifested in the work, 
 comparatively few of the operators even in the largest cities 
 either understand or practice the art of improving skin- so 
 afflicted. 
 
 In fact, even well-informed parents so far forget their 
 knowledge of physiology as to declare the blackheads should 
 not be removed, but allowed to "run their course." Their 
 awakening has been indeed bitter, for ordinarilv the result 
 of neglect in these cases terminates in most repulsive erup- 
 tions of pimples filled with pus, causing the skin to appear as 
 though it were dotted with festered lumps. In many in- 
 stances the flesh has become permanently thickened, and 
 the complexion made dull and muddy by this failure to take 
 the proper treatments. 
 
 The great secret of success in this work is in the exer- 
 tion of constant and untiring care. If all cases of black 
 heads were taken in hand immediately, and persistently 
 worked upon until cured, there would be more -nod com- 
 plexions to be seen, while obstinate disorders of this kind 
 would indeed be rare. 
 
 The term "blackhead" really is nol one used 1>\ th< 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 who wish to be correct, but it is so descriptive that it has be- 
 come commonly accepted and is universally known. The 
 books refer to these obstructions as comedones, while 
 many people still persist in declaring that "flesh worm" de- 
 scribes them perfectly, at the same time insisting that the 
 - are really alive. In point of fact, whatever may be 
 the term used, these much-discussed and troublesome inva- 
 ders are nothing but fat, white plugs, formed by accumula- 
 tion* of the sebaceous secretions that persist in blocking up 
 the pores and thus preventing the glands from perform- 
 ing their functions. 
 
 Although at one time supposed to indicate uncleanliness, 
 blackheads are so frequently found that the old idea has 
 given way to another in which all authorities declare -that 
 they are caused by some peculiar local condition and do not 
 necessarily indicate anything beyond this fact, though func- 
 tional disturbances and lack of sufficient nutrition may be 
 cited as disturbing elements. However, the majority of 
 cases are found in young and robust people who are other- 
 wise models of physical excellence, so this latest idea seems 
 to be based upon sound reason. 
 
 There are many varieties of these black plagues, all of 
 them requiring much attention and earnest work before 
 they can be persuaded to leave. Some are fine and so tightly 
 embedded in the skin that it seems impossible to dislodge 
 them. Others are large and coarse, and even protrude 
 above the surface, leaving deep pits in the skin when re- 
 moved, thus making much massage necessary in these spots. 
 Still others seem to possess a tendency to fester, and upon 
 pressure, not only the blackhead but pus comes out at the 
 same time. All of them require the same treatment, for 
 if the pores are to be made to appear as they should and 
 the glands are to perform their natural functions, these 
 
THE SKTN. 
 
 obstructions must be removed and the applications of oint- 
 ments made that will assist in the process of reducing the 
 size of the enlarged pores by restoring tone to the glands. 
 In removing blackheads care must be taken not to bruise 
 the tissue, and the habit of squeezing the skin between the 
 thumb nails, using a watch key or any instrument not espe- 
 cially intended for this purpose is to be strongly condemned. 
 The use of the face steamer before the work of pressing 
 these blackheads out, is also injurious, as the fat is extracted 
 from the tissues by means of the intense heat and this in- 
 creases the tendency of the skin to scar. The comedone 
 extractor is provided with a tiny scoop at one end and is 
 made with either a needle point or a knife at the other. 
 This instrument produces the best effect, for it not only re- 
 moves the blackheads easily by means of gentle pressure, 
 but it also marks the skin but little, and never permanently 
 scars or bruises the flesh. 
 
 HOW TO PROCEED IN THE BLACKHEAD AND PIMPLE WORK. 
 
 First of all, the face should be cleansed by anointing it 
 with lettuce cream, and using the automatic massage and 
 very warm water. All superfluous creme may now be re- 
 moved from the skin by the use of some absorbent cotton, 
 and the flesh well washed with a three per cent solution of 
 formalin, using for this purpose a soft cloth or some of the 
 cotton. The hands, of course, have been scrubbed with 
 soap and water and immersed in an antiseptic solution, and 
 the instruments cleansed as directed in the chapter on ster- 
 ilizing. The tiny scoop on the end of the comedone ex- 
 tractor is now used to press down at the side of each black- 
 head and gentle pressure exerted in order to force it out. If 
 it seems unusually obstinate it is best to pass on to the next 
 one or else use the needle point for puncturing the little fold 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 that sometimes forms over the black dots. It is best not 
 to remove too many at one time, and not to irritate the 
 flesh very much at first, as the skin is apt to be extremely 
 tender for a time. Pressure about the nose or on the fore- 
 head is rather painful and much care should be exerted 
 when working on these sections of the skin. In Illustration 
 8 the use of the comedone extractor and method of re- 
 
 The Comedone Extractor. 
 
 moving blackheads is nicely depicted. After all that will 
 c< fme out easily have been removed, the acne cream is ap- 
 plied, and massage with the finger-tips follows, pressing 
 with the balls of the fingers, especially upon the parts that 
 have been treated. This treatment is especially directed 
 toward improving the nutrition of the flesh and is a most 
 important part of the treatment. After about fifteen min- 
 utes' work the bag may again be filled with warm water 
 and used as before and the treatment finished by using the 
 cold water. 
 
 The work of treating pimples is to many so repulsive that 
 they refuse to even consider it. However, when one con- 
 siders the actual benefit not only physically but mentally 
 that will come to the one who is properly treated, this re- 
 pugnance will usually vanish, and instead a genuine interest 
 in the work will be manifested. 
 
 There are so many varieties of pimples that the very 
 list of names would be confusing, hence in speaking of them 
 they will all be classed under the very general title so com- 
 monly used. Those found either in connection with black- 
 heads or alone are invariably filled with pus and look red 
 
Figure 8. 
 I [sing the Comedone Extractor. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 and angry. They will sometimes appear in certain parts of 
 the face, and after remaining several weeks will vanish, 
 only to be replaced in a week or so with another pimple in 
 isely the same place and quite as obstinate as the first 
 one. ( >ther pimples will appear and itch so intolerably that 
 ems absolutely necessary to scratch the skin. The 
 finger-nails thus convey the infection from one part of the 
 skin to another and as a consequence the entire face be- 
 comes broken out in a disgusting eruption. In all cases, 
 the only way of permanently removing and curing these 
 pustules is by observing the following instructions: 
 
 The skin should be cleansed and prepared as directed 
 in blackhead work, and of course the same precautions 
 observed in sterilizing instruments and in preparing the 
 hands. The sharp end of the curette should then be em- 
 ployed to open the pimple and the tiny scoop used for 
 sing out the contents. After all the pus or cheesy mat- 
 ter that will come away easily has been pressed out, the 
 cavity may be entered by a fine-pointed needle attached to 
 a hypodermic syringe and conveying a stream of dioxide 
 of hydrogen. This must be injected carefully, a little at a 
 time as the pus unites with the dioxide to form a sizzling 
 white foam. The injections of the dioxide should be con- 
 tinued until no more foam appears. The method of using 
 this syringe is plainly shown in Illustration 9. As, in the 
 blackhead work, caution should be observed, as to opening 
 many pimples at a time or many in the same locality, for 
 the face frequently is extremely sensitive and it is impos- 
 sible to do much work at a sitting. After the pimples have 
 been opened and the contents expressed, deep massage 
 should be given with the acne cream and the treatment fin- 
 ished by the use of the hot and cold water and the auto- 
 matic massage and mallets. 
 
Figure; 9. 
 
 Using the Hypodermic Syringe. 
 
62 THE SKIN. 
 
 In case there is any fear about using the hypodermic 
 needle, much good may be accomplished in this work by 
 placing on the skin sheets of absorbent cotton soaked in the 
 dioxide of hydrogen. If the blood flows freely from these 
 incision-, so much the better, as this assists greatly in car- 
 rying away the effete matter. 
 
 Small pimples in which the pus seems upon the point of 
 bursting out should all be opened and the skin covered with 
 the sheets of cotton soaked in the dioxide, after pressure 
 has removed all of the contents that will come out readily. 
 
 In many instances, where the face is covered with pim- 
 ples and treatments have to be continued for some time, 
 the smaller ones that have not been touched will gradually 
 grow more and more minute and will finally disappear. 
 When this tendency exists, it is, of course, unnecessary to 
 open them. 
 
 The scars left from these incisions are generally in- 
 visible. Of course many instances have been quoted where 
 people have been scarred for life. This has been where 
 the instruments have not been properly sterilized or where 
 the patient, unable to keep her fingers away, has so irritated 
 the flesh that the inflammation has persisted for a long time. 
 Pimples opened in the usual manner at home by the aid of 
 a cambric needle, or any other instrument that happens to 
 be about, usually do leave a dull purple scar that takes 
 months to vanish and in some instances may remain perma- 
 nently. Professionals are so careful in their work and in 
 the use of nourishing ointment on the skin, that after the 
 course of a few days no obtrusive mark is visible, and in 
 two weeks or so the skin is generally smooth, as can be seen 
 in Figure 10. 
 
 Tn a few instances, where the pimples seem obstinate 
 about disappearing and where there is a dread of making 
 
Figure 10. 
 A Smooth Skin After Skillful Work. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 a fresh incision, the use of the negative needle has been of 
 much benefit. At least four cells should be used, and the 
 needle should be thrust into the skin for some depth, making 
 each insertion for about one-half minute and select- 
 ing at least four points for the purpose. The mallets may 
 also be employed after the usual massage, and the brisk 
 tattoo serves an important part in improving the nutrition of 
 the skin. After every treatment a little powder should be 
 dusted over the skin before the patient ventures into the 
 air, as following the use of so much hot water and massage 
 the skin is naturally extremely tender. 
 
 The results of these treatments are invariably all that 
 can be expected when the work is properly done and there 
 is no grave disorder of the system. Even where there are 
 other complications the use of these antiseptic preparations 
 on the skin will positively improve it greatly. Ordinarily 
 the statement may be made that every case with no draw- 
 backs in the way of physical disturbances of any impor- 
 tance will be permanently cured. Even after years of neg- 
 lect the greatest of changes can be made in skins that seem 
 absolutely hopeless by going at the work systematically. In 
 those who are young, and where the disease has not be- 
 come chronic, improvement is often most marvelous. 
 
 Unfortunately for both the masseuse and the patient, 
 they seldom meet until every other method recommended 
 b) every authority has been tried. This leaves the masseuse 
 not only with much work to do, but also with more to undo, 
 for frequently the efforts made to abolish the pimples have 
 been the very things that should, under no circumstances, 
 be attempted. 
 
 The masseuse who achieves the best results will be she 
 who plainly and honestly explains to her patients the method 
 she uses and who makes them realize that not only her 
 
THE SKIN. 65 
 
 efforts but theirs are necessary if the work is to be suc- 
 cessful. She must impress upon them that these afflictions 
 have in a maimer become "habits of the skin," and that like 
 Other habits, time will be required to correct them. She 
 can make no promises as to the length of time required, for, 
 as in everything else, it is impossible to definitely promise 
 relief by a certain date, owing to the uncertainty in regard 
 to the manner in which the skin takes the treatment. In 
 some instances the improvement in two or three weeks is 
 wonderful ; others require a month before much of a change 
 can be seen, and all skins require treatments at intervals for 
 some time, as there is often manifested a tendency to re- 
 lapse unless the work is continued long enough. 
 
 In small towns it is often impossible to find a good 
 masseuse, so in this event it will be necessary for the pa- 
 tient to do the work at home. Of course, the progress is 
 slower than when the treatments can be taken from a pro- 
 fessional, as it is nearly impossible to obtain the deep mas- 
 sage except when given by another person. Upon this one 
 thing much hinges, that when there is even the slightest 
 chance to obtain treatments they should be taken in order to 
 obtain the effect of the finger massage on the skin. Ex- 
 tremely difficult cases need at least one hour per day for 
 treatment, lighter cases require, say, two treatments a week 
 or work performed every other day, while ordinary cases 
 may be treated every fourth day until much improvement 
 is manifested. After that time once a week will be suffi- 
 cient. 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 DIET AND DIRECTIONS FOR HOME WORK IN CURE OF 
 BLACKHEADS. 
 
 When work must be done at home without other assist- 
 ance it must be performed systematically if the results are 
 to be pleasing. One of the most important requisites is in 
 the use of a good cleansing agent, for even after the pores 
 have been freed of the plugs, there is often a tendency to- 
 ward the formation of new ones. The ointments are twice 
 as efficacious when readily absorbed, hence the cleansing 
 agent must be used frequently and thoroughly to further 
 this end. If the skin is dry, sensitive and easily irritated, 
 it must be cleansed each night with soap practically neutral 
 in reaction. If on the other hand it is not only speckled 
 with blackheads, but appears to be oily and greasy, the tinc- 
 ture of green soap should be used. This is made as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 Tincture of green soap : 
 
 Green soap 4 g 
 
 Alcohol 4 § 
 
 Ether 4 g 
 
 Dissolve the green soap in the liquids and use by pouring 
 a little into hot water or directly upon the washcloth and 
 then immersing it in water. The cleansing must be reli- 
 giously done each night and the special cream (acne is the 
 best) should be rubbed in well with the tips of the fingers 
 after this process. In the morning the face may be washed 
 in cold water and the antiseptic lotion applied with a 
 sponge. If the skin seems unduly irritated by this, the 
 
THE SKIN. 61 
 
 lotion may be diluted by pouring a little into a bottle con- 
 taining some water. Then gradually the full strength may 
 
 be used. [f the skin appears badly, and the patient feel- 
 embarrassed about going out in public the acne cream ma\ 
 be applied and rubbed in well and the vegetable powder 
 dusted over it as a sort of disguise. 
 
 This work must be done every night, of course, even 
 when under treatment by a professional, and it will be 
 noticed that the rubbing recommended has a remarkably 
 ^'(^od effect on these obstinate little eruptions, for very fre- 
 quently, by applying a little acne cream and then using the 
 ball of the finger for massage with deep pressure, the pim- 
 ple that is just appearing will be persuaded to depart. 
 
 The use of the comedone extractor may be continued as 
 described, and at night before retiring after washing the skin 
 well with the warm water the little scoop may be used by 
 pressing gently at the side of each blackhead and endeavor- 
 ing to remove as many as possible without producing much 
 inflammation. The automatic massage may be easily used 
 after a little practice and will be valuable in making the im- 
 provement more rapid. 
 
 The diet is most important and should be closely 
 watched. One of the greatest skin specialists who uses this 
 method of treating his patients and who especially advo- 
 cates the comedone extractor and the deep massage is also 
 most anxious in regard to the diet adopted. The most diffi- 
 cult cases are placed upon a diet of bread and milk without 
 too much bread. Little meat is allowed excepting where 
 the patient is deficient in blood, and the following articles of 
 food are absolutely denied in all cases : Pastries, cakes, rich 
 gravies, salads, liquor, spiced food, fried foods of any 
 description and all sweets. The articles that seem most dif- 
 ficult to abstain from using are the sweets and pastries. By 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 urging and insisting, fruit may be substituted for these 
 dainties and the effect has been to so change the appetite 
 that the forbidden foods have not been desired. 
 
 mstipation must positively be abolished; the woman 
 or girl who expects to look well while in the possession 
 of a torpid liver may as well make up her mind to be dis- 
 appointed. In addition to the use of laxatives it is well to 
 regulate the bowels by eating as much fruit as possible and 
 also by physical culture exercises, especially those in which 
 these organs may be affected. Drinking a glass or so of 
 warm water a half hour before meals will also be most ef- 
 fective, especially when followed by eating foods that are 
 properly prepared. 
 
 Bathing is most important, and a very warm bath should 
 be taken at least three times a week, with a sponge once a 
 day over every portion of the body so that all of the pores 
 may have an opportunity for excreting the effete matter 
 and absorbing the materials applied. When the skin is 
 extremely oily, the bath made by adding the rock salt and 
 ammonia to the water may be used with good effect. The 
 liquid sulphur bath, also mentioned in the chapter on bath- 
 ing, will be found extremely beneficial in cases of this de- 
 scription. Care must be taken, however, in using this bath 
 to wash the face with clear water both before entering and 
 before leaving the bath. 
 
 Electricity is equally essential and should be employed as 
 suggested. In case the patient has obstinate pimples that 
 have recurred constantly for months and years, after they 
 have been opened and the pus extracted, the cavities should 
 be entered with the needle attached to the negative pole. 
 This should be done after the pus has been removed ex- 
 cepting in instances where it seems impossible to press out 
 the cheesy matter. In this event, the needle may be in- 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 sorted several times from different directions until the mat- 
 ter becomes sufficiently affected by the heat to become softer 
 and press out easily. The positive needle is not indicated in 
 this treatment, as the resulting scar is apt to be permanent. 
 After the pimples have disappeared fairly well, and there is 
 a desire to improve the nutrition of the skin, the bipolar 
 method may he used as illustrated and the lotion forced into 
 the skin, using a treatment that lasts for about fifteen min- 
 utes. In addition to this work the vibratile may be em- 
 ployed for the stimulating effect, though it is well to employ 
 the bipolar method first. 
 
 The masseuse will usually obtain better results in the 
 treatment of blackhead and pimple cases than the physician, 
 because she spends more time upon the after treatment. 
 All specialists insist upon the importance of massage as of 
 aid in restoring tone to the skin, but they object to the labor 
 involved, and after opening the pimples and removing the 
 blackheads dismiss the patient with either no massage, or 
 else so little that the effect is not worth mentioning. In 
 this work every detail must be considered and every aid 
 suggested intelligently employed, if the desired effect is to 
 be obtained. 
 
 The suggestions outlined here may seem to the casual 
 reader a bit difficult. In reality they are most simple and 
 the refined and sensitive woman who realizes the importance 
 of possessing a clear and attractive skin will most assuredly 
 not object to the amount of labor involved; and, when one 
 contrasts the repulsive and loathsome condition that results 
 from eruptions of this kind made even worse by the pres- 
 ence of innumerable blackheads, no task will seem too ardu- 
 ous if relief can be obtained. The presence of some disgust- 
 ing disease is invariably thought by the multitude to be in- 
 dicated by an eruption of any kind, while the semblance of 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 uncleanliness is so marked that it is impossible to imagine 
 a person so afflicted as really being clean. Actual practice 
 so quickly proves that it is unnecessary to possess these 
 5, that any one who is sufficiently ambitious will devote 
 every spare moment to the work, sparing no effort to rid 
 herself of the unsightly blemishes which not only disfigure 
 her face but also disturb her peace of mind. 
 
 MILIA. 
 
 An affliction almost as discouraging as blackheads, al- 
 though it possesses the distinction of being less repulsive, is 
 that known by the scientists as "milia" from the word 
 "milium" meaning millet seed. This name so aptly describes 
 the appearance of the skin that it is indeed happily chosen 
 for the tiny, hard lumps sometimes yellow and again pearly 
 white, varying in size from a small protuberance to one the 
 size of a large pin head, resemble more nearly than anything 
 else, the appearance of seed scattered over the face. Of 
 course these same scientific people who have bestowed this 
 appropriate name have spent much time in attempting to 
 find out why this condition exists, and have finally ended 
 by deciding that it is purely a local affair, having little or 
 nothing to do with the condition of the body. 
 
 As internal medication seems powerless to affect this 
 condition, it is well to consider the best means of applying 
 the external treatment for each tiny seed, whether em- 
 bedded in the skin or projecting above the surface is well 
 protected by a singularly tenacious little cap or sac that 
 must be opened by some sharp instrument such as a large 
 needle or the sharp end of the comedone extractor. The 
 lumps must then be pressed out and the cavity thoroughly 
 cleansed to do away with the chance of any recurrence and 
 the cure will then be permanent. 
 
THE SKIN. 71 
 
 The face is prepared as in the treatment for blackheads, 
 by the application of a cleansing creme, and the use of warm 
 water and the automatic massage. It is then carefully 
 washed again with a three per cent solution of formalin, 
 and the sac opened hy a sharp instrument. The small 
 cheesy lump is then teased out, and the cavity entered by 
 a sterilized needle, dipped into a forty per cent solution of 
 chromic acid. The sac is often surprisingly difficult to 
 penetrate, and even after it is opened the milium sometimes 
 remains obstinately attached to the upper surface, requiring 
 the expenditure of much skill in order to dislodge it without 
 injury to the skin. Naturally some discretion is to be ex- 
 erted in this work, as it is often unwise to remove many of 
 the milia at a time. Experience alone can teach how to 
 judge each individual case according to its peculiarities, how 
 much pressure to exert in coaxing these intruders to depart, 
 and how many to remove at a treatment. Care must be 
 taken to avoid any chance of a local inflammation and sensi- 
 tive skins will be difficult to work upon long at a time. 
 
 In some cases the face will become covered with tiny 
 red scabs, after the milia are removed. These scabs must 
 not be removed but allowed to dry and drop off, thus mak- 
 ing the danger of scarring much less. In others, the milia 
 are so small that the use of the needle or knife seems almost 
 impossible, in cases of this description the finest iridio 
 platinum needle attached to the negative pole of the gal- 
 vanic battery may be inserted in each little lump for a mo- 
 ment, and as a rule the effect is all that can be desired. In 
 very obstinate cases the use of the electric roller is a very 
 excellent supplement to the knife or curette, and treatments 
 may be given every other day. 
 
 After treatment consists in using the automatic massage 
 with warm water as before, followed by the use of the deep 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 finger m; given the same as in the blackhead treatment. 
 
 The same ointment, acne cream, is employed with very 
 good success, as the astringent properties are so marked 
 that the places operated upon seem to heal more rapidly 
 when thus worked upon. 
 
 In this work as in blackheads the chief requisite is in 
 persistence in a faithful endeavor to follow directions, not 
 occasionally, but as specified. In addition to the local work 
 it is well to bathe frequently in warm water and to exercise 
 methodically. 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 
 CHLOASMA. 
 
 The appearance of yellowish brown patches upon the 
 face has not only caused much mortification but also the 
 most strenuous efforts to banish. These so-called moth 
 or liver patches not only appear upon the cheeks, forehead, 
 upper part of the lip and neck, but are also found on various 
 sections of the body, and although for many years said to 
 have been caused by either a nervous or functional disease, 
 they very frequently appear without the least apparent rea- 
 son and remain quite as obstinately as those that are caused 
 by disease. Many patches of this description either precede 
 or accompany physical disturbances, also remaining long 
 after the cause has disappeared, thus making local treat- 
 ment a necessity, if relief is to be obtained. 
 
 The coloring matter is, as explained in a previous chap- 
 ter, situated in the rete malpighii and also to some extent 
 in the corium, both deeper layers of the skin. The applica- 
 tions of powerful remedies for the purpose of bleaching the 
 skin have, instead of curing the trouble, augmented it by 
 causing an inflammation which has resulted in an increased 
 deposit of pigment at this spot, lasting during the lifetime 
 and impossible to remove. 
 
 If the application of such remedies had been continued 
 only until redness appeared no such trouble would have oc- 
 curred. Hence in treating any such difficulty care must be 
 taken to warn the patients against a too vigorous use of a 
 remedy in an effort to become beautiful immediately. 
 
 In all external treatment of course the object is to have 
 the material employed absorbed as quickly as possible and 
 
U THE SKIN. 
 
 to have it so well prepared that the work shall be directed 
 particularly to the affected portions. To assist in this 
 process of absorption it is necessary that the skin should be 
 in the most cleanly condition and this is only possible when 
 baths arc taken frequently and the pores are kept free from 
 obstructions. The average person has about fourteen square 
 feel of skin to keep clean, and in this surface are approxi- 
 mately 2,000,000 sweat glands and 500,000 oil or sebaceous 
 glands to assist in throwing off the waste matter. The 
 daily bath will thus be seen to be a common necessity if the 
 skin is to be kept as it should be. 
 
 In the treatment of pigmented portions of the face or 
 neck, the use of the cleansing cream and automatic massage 
 are continued as before, and as soon as the warm water is 
 exhausted, if the bleaching process is to be quickly done, 
 the skin may be covered with compresses saturated in the 
 following solution : 
 
 Dioxide of Hydrogen 45 
 
 Lemon juice 2 § 
 
 Tinct. of Benzoin 1 5 
 
 Water 2 § 
 
 This compress may be left on until a tingling or smart- 
 ing is felt and then removed and the face washed well with 
 distilled or soft water and finger massage given, using the 
 whitening creme for this purpose. The cold water may be 
 used or not to finish this treatment, depending upon the 
 condition of the skin. Some faces are so easily irritated that 
 but little manipulation may follow, while with others a great 
 deal may be used to advantage. The skin should be well 
 powdered before allowing the patient to venture out and 
 the directions for home treatment given carefully, being as 
 follows : 
 
 Warm baths must be taken daily and the diet made as 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 simple as possible with absolutely no rich pastries or indi- 
 gestible food. The bowels must be kept in good condition, 
 
 and to assist in this process it is well to drink the juice of a 
 lemon in warm water each morning and one-half hour be- 
 E( re the other two meals to take a cup of hot water. Each 
 night the face may be washed with the paste soap and warm 
 water and the whitening- creme rubbed on, paying especial 
 attention to the pigmented spots. In the morning after 
 washing with cold water the bleaching lotion should be 
 applied, diluting it if necessary until the skin becomes ac- 
 customed to it. The face should be protected with powder 
 before venturing into the air. 
 
 The results of this treatment are generally to be seen 
 by the end of the first w T eek, but if the spots at the expira- 
 tion of the tenth day do not appear much lighter they may 
 be treated by the use of the galvanic current with very 
 good results. The positive pole may be used for applica- 
 tion to the face ; the proper electrode being a small sized 
 disc covered with absorption cotton and saturated with the 
 lotion. The negative pole may be used in the same manner, 
 using a solution of salt and water instead of the bleaching 
 lotion. The poles may be placed upon the face as illus- 
 trated in Figure 13, holding the positive electrode over each 
 pigmented spot for ten or fifteen minutes if possible, and 
 at any rate until the skin is thoroughly reddened. Massage 
 may follow as before. 
 
 Treatments should be given at least every second day 
 until the spots have faded. This method has the advantage 
 of being painless as well as efficacious and hence is popular 
 with both patient and masseuse. In using it not more than 
 six cells of the galvanic battery should be employed to com- 
 mence with, adding others as required, for unless care is 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 taken the patient may declare that the current makes her 
 a trifle dizzy. Even those most susceptible to the use of 
 the electric current are generally able to bear it if too much 
 is not used at one time, so discretion is necessary. 
 
 
CHAPTER X. 
 
 OILY, STIPrLED, AND SALLOW SKINS. 
 
 One of the most disagreeable and trying afflictions is the 
 condition commonly described as an "oily skin." The 
 greased and shining appearance is so marked that nothing 
 can conceal it. Drops of oil stand out in place of the ordi- 
 nary perspiration and the victim is frequently so mortified 
 that she dreads appearing in society, as the slightest exer- 
 tion causes this sebaceous secretion to be poured out like 
 an oily coating on the face and scalp and in some instances 
 upon the entire body. 
 
 The ducts of the sebaceous follicles are generally 
 plugged with comedones and the surface of the skin fre- 
 quently appears pallid and poorly nourished. The treat- 
 ment should be directed not only to the care of the face 
 and scalp but also to the proper care of the entire body, and 
 the diet as well as daily bath must be made matters of much 
 importance. 
 
 The lettuce cream may be applied most liberally before 
 using this massage treatment in these instances, as the un- 
 guent possesses great cleansing qualities. When, after a few 
 moments it is rubbed off, the amount of dirt that is found 
 on the towel will be found to be surprisingly great, for 
 the oily skin will naturally attract much soot and dust from 
 the air. In some instances it is even advisable to repeat the 
 application and thus cleanse the skin as thoroughly as pos- 
 sible before using the massage. In any event the solution 
 of borax may be used in just twice the proportion and hence 
 to every bag of water, one cup of this mixture may be added 
 as the alkaline mixture possesses the same cleansing quali- 
 
ffi THE SKIN. 
 
 Khibited by a mild soap. The water may be applied as 
 warm as possible and if the face is extremely oily the first 
 treatment may be prolonged to some extent. 
 
 The skin, being thoroughly cleansed, the acne cream may 
 now be applied, and the finger manipulation brought into 
 play in order to cause this cream to be well absorbed, as 
 it has an astringent action, especially desirable in such in- 
 stances. The rest of the treatment may be given as de- 
 scribed in the chapter on massage and the following instruc- 
 tion given for home treatment. The work has much better 
 results where the treatments may be taken at least two or 
 three times a week, for the first two weeks. After this time 
 once a week will be sufficient. It is especially necessary 
 to restore tone to the skin and for this purpose the manipu- 
 lation is extremely beneficial. 
 
 The diet should be limited to simply nourishing foods 
 and all oily articles resolutely cut out. No sweets or fats 
 or pastries should be eaten, but the fresh vegetables, broiled 
 or roasted meats, and fruits may be eaten in abundance. 
 The warm bath should be taken daily, and if the entire 
 body has this oily appearance it is well to add to the bath 
 one cup of soda and one of salt, allowing the entire body to 
 be immersed in the water for some few moments and then 
 using the shower with clear water. 
 
 Treatment of the face will consist in washing it with 
 warm water and a mild soap each night, the paste soap be- 
 ing particularly fine in such instances. Then acne cream 
 may be rubbed in well until every particle has been ab- 
 sorbed. In the morning cold water with no soap should be 
 used on the face and the lotion applied immediately after- 
 ward. 
 
 The results of this treatment generally become mani- 
 fested in a very short time and improvement will not only 
 
THE SKIN. 79 
 
 become more marked each day but a cure will result if 
 sufficient patience is exercised. ( If course, where this ten- 
 dency exists it is always well to watch the diet carefully 
 and in all cases bathing daily will naturally be a part of the 
 life. 
 
 Stippled skins, looking as though the faces had been used 
 for pin-cushions, are generally found in people who are 
 troubled with this appearance of oil. In some instances the 
 large pores have been caused from improper treatment of 
 blackheads and pimples, and in all cases the daily bathing 
 and routine just recommended for the oily skin will be ex- 
 tremely beneficial. A simple experiment said to have a 
 great effect upon refining the complexion may be made by 
 applying a mask of absorbent cotton each night, first dip- 
 ping it in distilled water. The mask is easily made by sim- 
 ply taking one layer and cutting out places for the eyes and 
 nose and mouth, then binding with tape and using as de- 
 scribed. The use of the creme and lotion will generally be 
 found all that is necessary, but the mask may be a valuable 
 aid. 
 
 SALLOW AND MUDDY SKINS. 
 
 Why people in perfect health should have complexions 
 that resemble russet leather is one of the puzzling problems 
 that all of us meet occasionally. Yet, there is rarely a day 
 that one cannot see a woman who might make a fine ap- 
 pearance were it not for the sallow hues that make almost 
 any color absolutely impossible. Cases of this kind may be 
 wonderfully benefited by systematic work, but to be effect- 
 ive it must be impressed upon the mind of the patient that 
 as the skin seems to have this tendency naturally, the daily 
 effort will therefore need to be systematic and persistent if 
 the skin is to be kept in a good condition. 
 

 THE SKIN. 
 
 Complexions of this kind do not need a skin food. It is 
 not powerful enough to bleach the skin and will therefore 
 iperfluous, unless there are lines to rub out, in which 
 instance, of course, it may be used in connection with the 
 whitening and bleaching creme. The masseuse generally 
 has a difficult customer to meet in the person of the woman 
 with a complexion that has been obdurate to treatment. Dis- 
 couraged and disheartened by past failures she demands a 
 positive improvement immediately, or she will not attempt 
 the work. The first treatment is therefore a matter of much 
 importance both to the masseuse and to the patient. 
 
 If the skin appears not only sallow but muddy and even 
 at a hasty glance as though it needed a good washing, in- 
 stead of using the lettuce cream as a preliminary to the 
 treatment it is well to wash the face thoroughly with soap 
 and water and then rinse it off with water to which a little 
 borax has been added. Then the undiluted peroxide of 
 hydrogen may be applied with a bit of cotton, not forget- 
 ting to care for the face as w T ell as the neck, and then when 
 the skin is dry the lettuce cream may be applied as usual 
 and the massage treatment given. After the warm water 
 has been exhausted and the flesh has been rubbed dry, an- 
 other application of the peroxide may be made, and then 
 the treatment continued. The manipulation of the face with 
 the fingers will in this instance be done after applying the 
 Marinello cream, not the skin food. 
 
 As the sallow 7 and muddy appearance is often caused by 
 exposure to the air, it is well to advise a protecting coat of 
 powder before going out. This precaution will frequently 
 keep the skin from acquiring the unbecoming color in the 
 spring and fall. 
 
 The home treatment will, of course, be recommended 
 as consisting of the daily bath, plain food, and in many in- 
 
THE SKIN. «1 
 
 stances a good course in physical culture 1 is especially bene- 
 ficial. The whitening cream may be used each night after 
 cleansing the skin thoroughly with soap and water and the 
 bleaching lotion should be applied in the morning and again 
 at noon if the face is in bad condition. If the skin seems to 
 need a thorough bleaching it may be done without injuring 
 the cuticle by simply applying the lotion twice a day and 
 omitting the creme at night for a time. When the face be- 
 gins to get rough again omit the lotion and resume the 
 creme for a day or two. Continue this until the skin is suf- 
 ficiently whitened. More rapid bleaching results may be ob- 
 tained by applying the lotion by means of the battery. 
 
 In connection with the subject of bleaching it is well to 
 explain that it is unnecessary to remove the cuticle in this 
 process. Quite as good work can be done by systematic 
 use of the massage and lotion and creme, and the results 
 will be far better, for all those who have undergone the 
 process of having the cuticle removed must also use most 
 exquisite care of the skin for months afterward, as other- 
 wise it will tan and peel and become utterly unmanageable. 
 The process itself is not so complicated that it cannot be 
 easily done, but the results are unsatisfactory and not to be 
 commended. The skin of the face and neck may not only 
 be bleached light enough to satisfy any one, but may even be 
 made whiter than the skin of the body by using the ma- 
 terials recommended and being careful to protect with 
 powder when going into the air. By applying a creme when- 
 ever the face gets at all rough and by discontinuing the 
 lotion there will be no trouble with an irritated surface, no 
 weeks of seclusion and months of care spent in protecting 
 a sensitive skin, but instead a clear, fresh complexion in a 
 healthy condition. 
 
 The coarse pores and rough appearance frequently found 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 with muddy complexions will in nearly every instance yield 
 speedily to the methods described, thus making the appear- 
 ance far more refined, for no woman can appear to good ad- 
 vantage if the complexion does not bear inspection. 
 
CHAPTER XI. 
 
 \LY, DRY AND FLABBY SKINS. 
 
 Fortunately for the majority of womankind, there are 
 comparatively few who are troubled with abnormally dry 
 or rough skins. In a few instances this trouble has ap- 
 peared in every member of a family, and from infancy, upon 
 any exposure to the air, the skin would immediately look- 
 as though some strong irritant had been applied. Tiny 
 scales would Hake off in great profusion and the skin appear 
 tight and drawn, with hundreds of tiny lines covering the 
 surface as though acting the part of forerunners for 
 wrinkles. A number of people have acquired this tendency 
 after a severe nervous strain or upon recovering from an 
 illness. 
 
 The face frequently burns and smarts and when washed 
 becomes red and inflamed, any application of soap making 
 the condition much worse. No powder can be applied to 
 protect the face, and even the slightest exposure always 
 means an increased amount of trouble; the cases seem 
 hopeless indeed. 
 
 The use of the automatic massage is in many instance^ 
 absolutely impossible, while in others it may in time so 
 harden the skin that the trouble becomes much less than 
 before. 
 
 When the skin is abnormally sensitive the following 
 method will be found extremely beneficial. The face and 
 neck may be coated well with lettuce cream, and then warm 
 cloths applied, using them as warm as can be borne with 
 comfort. This process may be continued until the flesh be- 
 comes uniformly pink, when the superfluous creme may be 
 
M THE SKIN. 
 
 removed by drawing the softest of towels gently over the 
 surface. Then an application of tissue food can be used 
 and the regular finger massage may be given. 
 
 ( Iccasionally one finds a case in which the use of water 
 at any time is actually impossible, as it produces a rough- 
 immediately. In every instance such as this an oil must 
 be used for cleansing the skin, instead of soap and water, 
 and to get the best results it should be used as warm as. pos- 
 sible. 
 
 This mixture has been found to be extremely beneficial : 
 Six ounces of the finest almond oil, one ounce of spermaceti, 
 one-half ounce of lanolin, and two ounces of witch hazel. It 
 may be heated by immersing the wide-mouthed bottle in 
 which it is kept in warm water until the mixture becomes 
 liquid enough to spread well on cotton. Then apply and 
 remove in a few moments in the usual manner. The mas- 
 sage should follow, and the skin be rubbed thoroughly with 
 the tissue food, following directions given for finger mas- 
 sage. In order to protect the skin from the action of the 
 air it should be well powdered before any exposure. 
 
 Complexions of this description need constant care to 
 keep them in good condition, and women who are so af- 
 flicted should make up their minds to submit cheerfully 
 to the inevitable in the shape of constant and frequent ap- 
 plications of oils and skin foods in order to keep the skin 
 smooth. The fact that other people use an application of 
 this kind once a day or once in two days should be no guide 
 to the work, for every woman must study her own needs and 
 fulfill them according to the peculiarities of her complexion, 
 regardless of what other people advise. 
 
 FLABBY AND WITHERED SKINS. 
 
 On many occasions young women have presented them- 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 selves for treatment with skins that looked as though they 
 belonged to women o\ seventy. In nearly every instance the 
 beginning oi the trouble could be traced to some severe 
 illness or protracted strain or nervous occupation. Return- 
 ing health seemingly does not affect the appearance of the 
 skin in such instances, and hence much work is necessary, 
 especially in the line of tonic treatments. 
 
 The electric current is most valuable and may be used 
 after the water massage has thoroughly cleansed the skin. 
 The Faradic current is best for the first work, and should 
 be used by applying the electrode with the cotton dipped in 
 a mixture of salt water and alcohol directly to the face. The 
 negative pole should be used and the treatment prolonged 
 until the skin glows from the friction. Then the massage 
 may be given by the use of the vibratile for a few moments, 
 followed by gentle finger massage. In extremely obstinate 
 cases cold salt sponge baths must be insisted upon for home 
 treatment. The diet should be of most nourishing foods 
 with plenty of bean, eggs and strong stock soups. The water 
 massage given with cold water to which alum has been 
 added should be used every night, massaging the skin after- 
 ward with the whitening creme. After four treatments 
 with the Faradic current, which should be taken at least 
 twice a week, the galvanic current may be used by saturat- 
 ing the cotton in the lotion and applying it as the positive 
 electrode to the face until the skin begins to appear pink. 
 This should be continued until a uniform rosiness is seen 
 and then the finger massage given as before. At least one 
 or two months' patient work will be necessary before im- 
 provement can be expected. By the end of that time the 
 effects will be so good that no one can doubt the efficacy of 
 the treatments, and from that time on, improvement will be 
 steady and sure. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 The use of the galvanic current may be alternated with 
 that of the Faradic if the patient desires, or it may be con- 
 tinued to the close of the period. Although this treat- 
 ment is mentioned particularly for younger people, it also 
 does great things for those who are older and as a conse- 
 quence many of the elderly women who have pride in their 
 appearance take these treatments regularly, as the effect is 
 so beneficial. 
 
CHAPTER XII. 
 
 FRECKLES, TAN AND SUNBURN. 
 
 The freckled maiden may have Titian hair and brilliant 
 coloring and dewy eyes with long black lashes, but if her 
 complexion is as spotted as the guinea hen's her beauty 
 is marred indeed. The pigment spots, as in the case of moth 
 patches, are situated in the deeper layers of the skin, and 
 are almost invariably made more pronounced by exposure 
 to the sun and air. 
 
 As a rule, those afflicted with freckles have unusually 
 fine skins, and when free from these discolorations the com- 
 plexions generally far outshine the ordinary type. In al- 
 most every case most wonderful improvement may be made 
 by adopting the best method of caring for the skin, and 
 ennging to it until the freckles have vanished. The most 
 difficult part to learn is that of constantly protecting the 
 skin from the influence of the sun and air, as even two or 
 three hours' exposure without the proper protection will 
 almost invariably result in a fresh crop of brown spots. In 
 some instances the effect of the heat and light, even when 
 kept away by thicknesses of cloth, is sufficient to freckle 
 the arms and neck. 
 
 The treatment of these cases, whether the freckles are 
 light or dark, is almost invariably the same and is best per- 
 formed in the following manner : After thoroughly cleans- 
 ing the skin with the water massage a mask may be cut out 
 of a layer of absorbent cotton and thoroughly soaked in a 
 solution made by mixing equal parts of peroxide of hydro- 
 gen and lemon juice. If the skin is extremely sensitive and 
 commences to burn immediately and looks blotched the masK 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 should be removed instantly and the water again used. Then 
 the massage may be given, using the tissue food if the face 
 is extremely tender and the whitening creme if it is not. 
 The treatment is finished by powdering the face well. If 
 the progress seems too slow after the first few treatments 
 the use of the galvanic current with the positive electrode 
 saturated in the bleaching lotion may be employed, using 
 the current for fifteen minutes each time. 
 
 Work at home consists in using a mild soap each night 
 with warm water, and then massaging well with whitening 
 creme before retiring. In the morning nothing but cold 
 water should be used and no soaps should be employed at 
 this time. Immediately after drying the skin, the bleaching 
 lotion may be employed by using a small sponge and thor- 
 oughly saturating it before applying. If the lotion is too 
 severe it may be diluted as required by pouring out a small 
 quantity and adding the same amount of water to it. The 
 friction at night by means of massage with the finger tips 
 is most important and should not be discontinued until the 
 freckles have entirely disappeared. Even then the whitening 
 creme should at least be employed alternately with a skin 
 food, using one or the other each night, and always applying 
 a good powder before exposure to the air. 
 
 The most obstinate cases of freckles can always be made 
 much lighter by this process while ordinary varieties may be 
 cured in a very short time. Of course, severe or dark freckles 
 require much more work and it is because of them that 
 so many women insist upon undergoing the "peeling proc- 
 ess" each year. It is not necessary to remove the cuticle, 
 as so many declare, though to thoroughly bleach the skin 
 may, of course, irritate it to some extent. Those who 
 wish to attempt it may use the articles advised and the 
 galvanic treatment as well, discontinuing the use of the lo- 
 
THE SKIN. 89 
 
 tioil when the face becomes decidedly red. Xo freckles can 
 be kept in subjection without work. Those who have them 
 must remember that this tendency is inborn and must be 
 watched and guarded against the same as other blemishes of 
 this kind. In some instances, as people grow older, this in- 
 clination or tendency seems less marked, and frequently the 
 skin becomes free from the spots, from no particular reason. 
 The majority of sufferers, however, need to use constant 
 care to prevent acquiring more freckles as well as to aid in 
 getting rid of the old ones. In all of this work the habit of 
 protecting the skin is the most important and care should be 
 taken to avoid washing the face either just before or just 
 after exposure to the air. The best manner to use a powder 
 is to apply it after a skin food has been rubbed in well, and 
 in order to make it effective care must be taken to see that 
 the powder is one that w T ill cling to the skin well. No am- 
 bitious woman w T ill be deterred from this work by the fact 
 that she must be constant in her attentions, for she knows 
 all good results require much and untiring application. 
 
 TAN. 
 
 The bronze coloring has been so popular for the past 
 few years that some of the faddists have spent much time 
 in acquiring a coating, that cost many dollars to remove. 
 The desire to look weather-worn can usually be easily ac- 
 complished, for few T people need more encouragement than 
 an occasional outing on the river or driving through the 
 country with no protection to the skin in the way of head 
 covering or even a coat of powder. Once obtained it is ex- 
 tremely difficult to remove, and very frequently a thorough 
 bleaching must be undergone before the brown shades van- 
 ish sufficiently to make the face presentable if light colors 
 are to be worn. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 1 hat there is no necessity for acquiring this coloring 
 may be seen by the scores of enthusiasts who spend much 
 time on the golf links or boating with none of the added 
 tints so undesirable in the majority of cases. The care of 
 the skin necessary in preventing such complications is prac- 
 tically the same as in freckles, and creams and powders 
 must be used liberally as directed if the skin is to be kept 
 tree from defects. It is well to avoid the use of much water 
 on the skin when out in the air a great deal, using a cleans- 
 ing creme of some kind instead of water. The whitening 
 creme should be used religiously each night and the Creme 
 Celeste may be employed as a sort of skin food before using 
 the powder, or the tissue food may be used for that pur- 
 pose. If one is desirous of trying a few of the home-made 
 concoctions, the strawberry paste and cream may be ap- 
 plied for the purpose of removing the tan. The recipes ap- 
 pear in the chapter on the making of creams, and are ex- 
 tremely effective when carefully prepared. 
 
 SUNBURN. 
 
 Sunburn is generally dreaded by those who suffer from 
 it, not only because it is particularly unbecoming, but also 
 on account of the actual discomfort and pain suffered by 
 those unfortunate enough to be afflicted. In reality, there 
 are few things easier to avoid than this very trouble, as 
 hundreds of people who have become enlightened can cheer- 
 fully testify. The same general rules applying to the pro- 
 tection of the face in preventing tan and freckles also ap- 
 ply here. Where there is evinced a decided tendency to burn 
 on the slightest exposure, it is best to use no water upon 
 the face for days at a time, instead using the cleansing 
 creme during the day and the tissue food or Creme Celeste 
 at night. If much time is spent upon the water, the care 
 
THE SKIN. 91 
 
 should be redoubled, as it seems particularly difficult to 
 avoid burning when subjected to the strong glare of the 
 sun, and the reflection back from the water. 
 
 If one has been unfortunate enough to incur a severe 
 burn the treatment is simple, and consists of applying the 
 most soothing- ointments until the skin is again in a normal 
 condition. A very pleasing mixture, called the Traveler's 
 Comfort, may be made by adding to six ounces of almond 
 oil one of lanoline, two of spermaceti, one of white wax 
 and one drachm of Balsam of Peru. Perfume as desired 
 and use each night for massaging the skin and before ap- 
 plying powder. If it is impossible to obtain any of the 
 articles mentioned, it may be remembered that any good cold 
 cream or pure oil may be used. If almond oil is not to be 
 secured, olive oil may be applied, and if in an emergency 
 the powder has been lost or mislaid the best substitute is 
 found in pure household cornstarch. This simple remedy 
 dusted on inflamed surfaces proves to be very soothing and 
 will greatly assist in the work of reducing the inflamma- 
 tion. The warm oil mixture under the treatment of scaly 
 skins may also be used for cleansing the face during the 
 day, though the other articles are usually amply sufficient 
 for any case. Properly managed, the most sensitive skin 
 may be kept from burning, no matter how great the ex- 
 posure may be. The exceptions to this statement are found 
 only where, either from indolence or ignorance, sufficient 
 care has not been taken to insure a thorough protection 
 from the sun. 
 
CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 THE USE OF POWDER. 
 
 For some mysterious reason women who are otherwise 
 well informed have exhibited a most unreasonable preju- 
 dice against the use of powder. They gaze upon the inno- 
 cent puff with horror and flee from the attractively labeled 
 box containing this cosmetic as though it were also marked 
 "dangerous.'' When some of these fastidious souls are ques- 
 tioned as to a good substitute, the answer is almost invar- 
 iably the same and one hears talcum recommended vigorous- 
 ly. A distinction without a difference and one that makes 
 the average woman chuckle, for she has tried the same 
 thing and knows that talcum as a protection is useless. 
 
 If the antiquity of the custom could make it more com- 
 mendable nothing more would be needed, for the ancient 
 volumes are filled with references to the use of cosmetics, 
 and specially to those used for the purpose of concealing im- 
 perfections of the skin. In fact, Job's third daughter was 
 named Keren-Happuch, meaning horn of paint (Job. 42: 
 14), indicating rather plainly that there must have been 
 some degree of favor shown this particular cosmetic in one 
 household. 
 
 Returning to more modern times, it is refreshing to 
 learn that nearly all men have been wise enough to realize 
 how necessary the use of powder is as a protection to the 
 skin, and as a consequence the barbers insist upon powder- 
 ing the faces of their customers immediately after shaving 
 them, thus avoiding the danger of irritation from the sun 
 or air. For the purpose of protection the powder must be 
 of a variety that will adhere well and smoothly, otherwise 
 
THE SKTN. 98 
 
 the face will appear scaly and rough and give the impres- 
 sion of being coated with the material used. 
 
 A pure vegetable powder is thus in great demand, for, in 
 addition to the office of protection, the fastidious woman in- 
 sists that it shall possess the very desirable quality of harm- 
 lessness, and this is not possible when any of the well-known 
 heavy, white mineral substances are employed. Rice flour, 
 though much quoted, is rarely used, as it is difficult to pro- 
 cure, and hence either one of the many starches made from 
 corn, wheat or beans is usually employed as a basis for a 
 mixture of this kind. The ideal powder cannot be made by 
 the amateur or the ordinary manufacturer, as the process is 
 so complicated that it requires a most elaborate outfit to 
 produce the cosmetic properly, as in the many different 
 siftings not only many varieties of bolting cloth and the 
 employment of people who understand the work, but also 
 the presence of a competent chemist as well. Of course, 
 there are many formulae extolled, but the one in greatest 
 favor demands the use of the finest and purest almond pow- 
 der, orris powder, wheat starch and rice starch, sifted 
 through bolting cloth several times, then tinted and per- 
 fumed and blended with a most delicate oil into a mixture 
 not only soft and fine, but also possessing the quality of 
 sticking on the skin as well. The sifting process is what 
 really makes the powder — making a work much beyond 
 the reach of the ambitious amateur owing to the expense 
 of the different grades of bolting cloth required, varying 
 from the ordinary mesh to the very finest. It is said that the 
 best powder is sifted at least seven times. The tinting, too, 
 is a matter of some consequence, and as there is never a skin 
 that is positively white, the well-made powder should as 
 closely as possible simulate the colors observed. The ap- 
 plication of a pure, white powder to the ordinary skin 
 
»» THE SKIN. 
 
 makes it look as though it were coated with something like 
 whitewash, the dark-colored portions showing through in a 
 bluish shade, presenting a most unnatural appearance. The 
 color most popular for use on all skin is that termed "flesh" 
 and is made by adding traces of carmine, or carmine and 
 ochre to the white materials until a peculiar chamois tint is 
 produced. 
 
 Powder should always be applied before venturing into 
 the air, and especially when about to embark upon a boating, 
 driving or any other expedition. The most practical man- 
 ner of applying it is to first rub on some skin food and 
 after a few moments remove all the oil that may be found 
 upon the skin, then dust on the powder with a soft bit of 
 cotton cloth, and remove all that does not cling well by 
 rubbing a dry cloth over the face. In this manner the 
 roughness, burning and irritation generally following upon 
 exposure to the sun may be avoided and the skin kept 
 smooth and fresh. Coats of tan are much more easily ac- 
 quired than lost, and the girl who values her appearance 
 will endeavor to preserve the most precious of possessions — 
 a good complexion — while protecting a poor one from fur- 
 ther defects. 
 
 A pleasing and fragrant mixture that may be used after 
 the bath for the purpose of preventing the disagreeable 
 odor from perspiration from being noticed is made by mix- 
 ing these ingredients together : 
 
 POWDER FOR USE AFTER BATHING. 
 
 Powdered orris root 4 § 
 
 Boracic acid (powdered) 1 § 
 
 Sub-nitrate bismuth 1 § 
 
 Corn starch 4 § 
 
 Those who are anxious to try mixing powder that, 
 though not purely vegetable, is still uninjurious, may try 
 
THE SKIN. 95 
 
 the following recipe, said to have belonged to a collection 
 
 made by the famous Catherine De Medici, who was almost 
 as much envied for her knowledge of the cosmetic art as 
 she was hated for her attempts to rid the world of those 
 she disliked : 
 
 Best Venetian talc 4 § 
 
 Sulphate barium 55 
 
 Corn starch 4 § 
 
 Rice flour 2 § 
 
 Sift all together through a coarse sieve, several times, 
 so that the lumps in the barium sulphate may be broken up. 
 Then add one-half ounce of lanolin and one ounce of almond 
 oil and sift again. Add to these ingredients sufficient car- 
 mine and ochre to make the tint a soft tan and sift through 
 three grades of bolting cloth before adding the perfume, 
 which may be either oil of rose, nerolli or any other odor 
 desired. The next four sittings will be necessary in order 
 to make the powder fine enough to use on the face. 
 
 A powder for which there is much demand is that made 
 by mixing one of these strongly white ingredients with water 
 and thus making a so-called "liquid powder." Although 
 useful for the neck and arms when unsightly blotches or 
 redness prevent making a good appearance, the application 
 upon the face should be made most sparingly lest the skin 
 be made dry and scaly. 
 
 LIQUID COSMETIC. 
 
 Oxide of zinc 1 o 
 
 Barium sulphate 1 
 
 Glycerine 1 3 
 
 Alcohol 1 ?) 
 
 Water 6 | 
 
 Cologne ^3 
 
96 THE SKIN. 
 
 Mix thoroughly and strain through cotton or fine bolt- 
 ing cloth. Keep in a tightly corked bottle and apply with 
 a sponge when required. 
 
 Equal in importance to the proper application of the 
 powder is the manner of removing it, and if the skin is to 
 be kept in a thoroughly fine condition the powder must 
 positively be removed by a thorough cleansing each night. 
 The most harmless substances may cause a great deal of 
 trouble unless this precaution is observed. When traveling, 
 a cleansing creme will remove the dust and the powder 
 quite as effectively as soap and water. On other occasions 
 the ordinary means may be employed. The respect with 
 which this cosmetic is held by some people may well be 
 estimated by the very general use it enjoys, for it is said of 
 the modern maid that — 
 
 She may live without love, never owning a heart, 
 She may live without music, and drama and art ; 
 She may live without having a sin to confess, 
 With a calm disregard for new hats or a dress ; 
 She may live without rarebit or lobster or chowder, 
 But where is the maid who can live without powder? 
 
niALTER XLV. 
 
 THE ART OF BATHING. 
 
 To the ordinary mortal the bath is a matter of routine, 
 to be taken at regular intervals for the purpose of cleansing 
 the body. That it may have far-reaching results in the way 
 of relieving certain conditions or of remedying grave de- 
 fects of the skin, many are unwilling to believe. However, 
 it is not necessary to convert, for just a little insistence in 
 the way of prescribing the bath will soon bear speedy re- 
 sults. 
 
 The educated bather, and by that is meant the woman 
 who understands just what benefits may be derived from 
 the proper use of the bath, has her daily plunge into luke- 
 warm water, followed by the cold sponge. In addition to 
 this there is the warm bath, taken at least twice a week, at 
 a temperature sufficiently high to induce a vigorous perspira- 
 tion. If possible, one of these baths should be either a Rus- 
 sian or Turkish bath, followed by massage given by an 
 experienced operator. The results of this system of bathing 
 may be seen in the clear skin and youthful appearance of 
 the devotee to cleanliness. Her figure, too, bears testi- 
 mony to the fact that rarely does superfluous flesh persist 
 when the pores are kept free from obstructions and the body 
 maintained in an absolutely active condition. 
 
 Of course, there are numerous methods of taking baths 
 and many improvements on the plain bath, all of which will 
 be considered in order of importance. The first considera- 
 tion is naturally the kind of water that must be used for 
 the purpose. If this is extremely hard, making the skin 
 feel peculiarly sensitive and irritated afterward, it will be 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 well to make use of the following formulae, mixing the in- 
 gredients and keeping a large supply on hand constantly, 
 so that the effort may be systematically conducted: Borax, 
 one pound; aromatic spirits of ammonia, one pound; soda, 
 one pound. Mix together and keep in a mason fruit jar, 
 using one cup of the mixture for the ordinary tub bath. 
 Then in lieu of a washcloth nothing can be better, both for 
 the effect on the skin and for the pleasure of using it, than 
 the bran mitten. This is made by cutting out a piece of 
 cheesecloth into a six-inch square. These squares may then 
 be stitched together, leaving only a small opening at one 
 end in which to put the bran. When filled comfortably — 
 that is, just enough to make the mitten about three-quarters 
 of an inch in thickness — the opening may be closed and the 
 mitten is ready for use. The benefit from the bran is sup- 
 posed to come from the gluten in it, which strengthens and 
 softens the tissues. The warm water, of course, assists in 
 this process. In a bath of this kind no soap is necessary 
 to assist in the cleaning process, as the bran is sufficient. 
 If the skin is at all sensitive after leaving the bath, showing 
 a tendency to peel and flake off, nothing can be better to use 
 for anointing the entire body than the following prepara- 
 tion, made easily by observing the directions : 
 
 Gum tragacanth i § 
 
 Borax I § 
 
 Glycerine 2 § 
 
 Alcohol 2 % 
 
 Water enough to make a thick jelly. 
 
 Powdered orris root 2 § 
 
 Dissolve the gum tragacanth in enough water to make 
 it thoroughly transparent and then add the glycerine and 
 alcohol. More water may then be added as necessary, using 
 the orris powder last of all. This mixture is generally 
 
THE SKIN. 99 
 
 named jelly of violets and has the advantage of drying in 
 almost immediately, thus obviating all danger of producing 
 
 a stick) feeling. In addition to the use of this jelly, after 
 bathing it is often necessary to anoint the hody with a good 
 creme before entering the hath. In this case Creme Celeste 
 will he found extremely beneficial. 
 
 People troubled with eruptive diseases of the skin or 
 obstinate comedones are much benefited by the sulphur 
 baths. When it is impossible to take baths of this kind 
 excepting at home, the method may be made extremely easy 
 by purchasing a bottle of the liquid sulphur. There is said 
 to be enough in one of these bottles for eight baths. The 
 best way to use this substance is to pour the amount re- 
 quired into the water that is about body-temperature, and 
 then after entering the bath, have a sheet drawn over the 
 tub and up closely around the neck of the bather. The 
 warm water may then be added until the bath is as hot as 
 can be taken with any comfort. This will usually induce 
 a copious perspiration. Before entering a sulphur bath, the 
 face and neck should be carefully washed with clear, warm 
 water, and after leaving the bath the same precaution should 
 be observed. 
 
 Nervous temperaments are wonderfully benefited by 
 means of the electric bath, and so great is said to be the 
 curative effects of these baths that in many instances most 
 stubborn cases have been improved rapidly by the prop- 
 er amount of bathing. This fact should be of especial 
 interest to the many who are afflicted with the brown dis- 
 coloration termed "moth patch," for it is said that many 
 of these most obstinate and disfiguring spots may be much 
 assisted by this process. 
 
 When the effect of friction is desired from the use of 
 bran baths, this may be obtained by adding a peck of the 
 
 LofC. 
 
A Convenient Faradic Bath Apparatus. 
 
 or Sin' £ '" any K atl ! r °° m in conn ection with any porcelain 
 Diced in 1 Z T tU v'- the movable bath tub electrodes being 
 placed in any desired position on opposite sides or ends of the tub 
 
 SflfSSS appHcati0n 0f the cu "ent to any S p°ortionof tnebody 
 
 
THE SKIN. 101 
 
 ordinary bran to the warm bath, and rubbing the body 
 vigorously with the bands. Some people prefer to use oat 
 meal in the bath, claiming that the effect is even better, while 
 still others assert that common rock salt added to the water 
 in large quantities and then used to produce a decided glow 
 is the best of all. Of course, the difference in action be- 
 tween salt and a substance containing gluten is too great to 
 admit of any comparison. Hence those who prefer salt 
 baths may use them for the purpose of stimulation, but not 
 with the idea of softening the skin. 
 
 The temperature at which the water should be used may 
 be regulated according to the effect desired. In baths near 
 the body temperature the perspiration ceases, no sweat is 
 secreted, but instead the fluid generally excreted is retained 
 in the skin. Warm baths have a relaxing effect. They 
 dilate the blood-vessels and cause an abundant excretion 
 of fluid. Cold baths harden the skin and have much in- 
 fluence in accustoming one to low temperature, but do not 
 cleanse the skin to any extent, while in addition they pro- 
 duce a shock not either agreeable or safe for those of 
 weakened constitutions. A safe rule to adopt in order to 
 avoid the danger of catching cold, or of becoming at all 
 weakened by warm baths, is that of using a cold sponge 
 immediately afterward, thus uniting the methods in a way 
 that is sure to be beneficial. 
 
 In connection with bathing, the use of the best soap 
 is a matter of much importance. And, strange as it may 
 seem, not one person in a hundred seems to realize what a 
 good soap really is. The majority of people long for soaps 
 producing great quantities of lather. Others insist upon 
 finely perfumed articles and pay exorbitant prices for dain- 
 tily scented packages. Wise people either cling to the mild 
 and pure imported castile or use a paste soap that is nearly 
 neutral in reaction. 
 
102 THE SKIN. 
 
 The harm done by some of these strongly alkaline soaps 
 can hardly be overestimated. They not only induce a pre- 
 maturely aged appearance of the skin by extracting the fat 
 from sebaceous glands and tissues, but also produce more 
 or less deep cauterizations. Dry or scaly skins are espe 
 daily injured by the use of such soaps, while people in- 
 clined to wrinkle easily may, upon observation, notice that 
 each application of a soap of this description is followed 
 by the appearance of numerous small lines that indicate 
 the coming of the deeper creases. 
 
 The best of all soaps is the one that can cleanse with- 
 out injury. It should be nearly neutral in reaction, produce 
 but a little lather, and leave the flesh feeling soft and smooth 
 instead of dry and drawn. When the ordinary castile does 
 not suffice, paste soap should be used by rubbing it up with 
 warm water into a soft lather. No soap should be used 
 oftener than once a day, and many skins will not tolerate 
 the use of the mildest of preparations, even as often as this, 
 so in the use of this cleansing agent as in other things, 
 discretion will be found a very good aid. 
 
CHAPTER XV. 
 
 THE SUBJECT OF STERILIZING INSTRUMENTS. 
 
 The masseuse who would do good work must not only 
 understand how to manipulate the muscles, open and cleanse 
 pustules and coax the signs of age away, but she must also 
 learn and practice how to thoroughly sterilize her instru- 
 ments for this work. 
 
 The necessity for this knowledge is so great that it is 
 strange in this age of universal information to find so many 
 who neither seem to know nor care anything about this 
 extremely important subject. Not only must the instru- 
 ments themselves be thoroughly cleansed, but the hands of 
 the masseuse must also be taken into account and rendered 
 as harmless as possible. Soap and water alone are not 
 sufficiently powerful to really clean any hand, and especially 
 to make the finger-nails properly free from germs. In 
 every instance there must be used, not only these ordinary 
 agents, but also something stronger, such as either the 
 1-2000 per cent of mercuric chloride, as advocated in many 
 hospitals, or the three per cent formalin solution used effect- 
 ively and very generally for skin w r ork. 
 
 The cleansing or sterilizing of instruments may be ac- 
 complished by two methods, either by boiling for a few mo- 
 ments in water to which one per cent of soda has been 
 added, or by immersing in a ten per cent solution of forma- 
 lin. It is a well-known fact that heat destroys nearly all 
 germs very effectively, while chemicals are more or less 
 limited in their action, though, of course, effective in many 
 cases. The careful masseuse should be provided with a 
 ten per cent solution of formalin and water, and after 
 
(04 THE SKIN. 
 
 using an instrument should cleanse it with water and alco- 
 hol, and then allow it to remain in this solution for a few 
 moments; for instance, there should be a little flat enameled 
 dish used for this purpose, and into this the formalin solu- 
 tion may be poured, using a fresh supply, of course, for 
 each patient, and always afterward rinsing the instrument 
 off with clear hot water. If the boiling process of steriliza- 
 tion is used, the instrument may be cleansed first and then 
 subjected to the action of the boiling water for, say, foui 
 or five minutes. This does not mean water from a tap that 
 is extremely warm, but really boiling water, such as may 
 be obtained by placing the tiny dish over a flame and allow- 
 ing the water to boil vigorously. This process of steriliza- 
 tion must extend to everything used, the tiny cup of the 
 automatic massage, the curettes, and the mallets and rollers 
 used for massage. These last-named articles may perhaps 
 better be immersed in the formalin solution, as the boiling 
 water is not the thing for hard rubber or ivory, while the 
 steel instruments may be subjected to the boiling. 
 
 The hands of the operator should be carefully cleansed 
 before she touches the face of the patient, and this is to be 
 done by scrubbing well with soap and water and then 
 rinsing in either the bichloride or formalin solution. The 
 skin is always covered with a multitude of germs, some of 
 them entirely harmless ; others, undoubtedly, germs of dis- 
 ease; any of them well calculated to make much mischief 
 at the first provocation, or when they can gain an entrance 
 into the skin, as through an incision. Hence before open- 
 ing any pustules or removing blackheads the skin should be 
 washed with an antiseptic solution of formalin. In order to 
 prevent irritation this solution may be made by using dis- 
 tilled water and adding a little glycerine, thus: Distilled 
 water, 48 ounces; glycerine, y 2 ounce; and formalin, l>^ 
 
THE SKIN. 105 
 
 ounces. This solution may be poured on to the bit of cot- 
 ton, and then used for washing and cleansing the face. 
 Then the pimples may he opened with the instruments pre- 
 viously sterilized, and the peroxide of hydrogen used to 
 destroy the elements upon which the germs multiply, though 
 of course this liquid may be of some use in destroying 
 germs as well. The acne cream, to be used for massage, 
 is an ointment containing an antiseptic which may by ab- 
 sorption tend to destroy the germs contained in the pus- 
 tules, and thus prevent recurrences; hence the necessity foi 
 deep massage after the contents of these spots have been 
 removed. 
 
 In using any creme, it is well to take the precaution of 
 using from a small amount, rather than from large por- 
 tions that may be made a breeding-place for the multipli- 
 cation of germs by the careless masseuse who places her 
 fingers from the face to the jar, and back again, times in- 
 numerable. The ordinary skin food is rarely possessed ot 
 any germicidal power and may thus be made a medium 
 of much danger. 
 
 Hence care should be taken to see that the cremes are 
 used from small jars, and renewed daily, or oftener if neces- 
 sary, to invariably use bits of absorbent cotton for remov- 
 ing the creme and applying to the face, and if it has been 
 impossible to get enough the first time, to employ a fresh 
 hit of cotton each time the creme is applied to the skin. 
 In applying powder this same precaution should he ob- 
 served, and the powder should be sifted on to the fresh hit 
 of cotton used for each patient, instead of dipping the cot- 
 ton into the box. 
 
 Instruments should be wrapped in cotton to protect the 
 points and edges and kept away out of sight, not lying 
 where dust and floating impurities in the air may cover 
 
106 THE SKIN. 
 
 them, but in some good case or drawer, where they will 
 be free from more than the ordinary amount of dust. The 
 cotton used should be kept in a metallic receptacle or drawer 
 and not exposed to the air and dust, and the supply of towels 
 or articles used should always be kept out of sight as much 
 as possible, so that the paraphernalia may be kept fresh and 
 attractive. 
 
 So with the solution and jars used, the labels and out- 
 ward appearance must be attractive. There is no excuse for 
 carelessness in this respect. The appearance of any room 
 for the purpose of skin treatment should be as scrupulously 
 neat and attractive as possible. Every patient has a right 
 to demand that all possible effort be made to keep the 
 articles used upon her face and hands absolutely free from 
 any danger of infecting her. The competent masseuse will 
 need no urging to devote the time necessary to this work. 
 
 Those who read these lines feeling that such precautions 
 are unnecessary will do well to remember that each year 
 is raising the standard; and requirements for these respon- 
 sible positions are consequently becoming more rigid. Op- 
 erators w T ho get the best results will naturally be the most 
 popular, and will obtain equally pleasing returns financially. 
 
 The skillful operator occupies a prominent place in the 
 lives of women, for she means to them a powerful aid in 
 preserving their complexions, increasing their period of 
 enjoyment in proportion to the youthful appearance they 
 are able to present. Many women are really young as 
 long as they appear to be, and they dread the encroach- 
 ments of age not so much because of the fear of losing their 
 beauty, but more on account of the dread of the loss of af- 
 fection and attention they think will follow as their ability to 
 attract and please decreases. 
 
 It is especially with the hope of impressing upon ail 
 
THE SKIN. 107 
 
 women in this business the necessity for absolute honesty 
 
 that those linos have been written. The more generally 
 full knowledge on this subject is disseminated, the better 
 for investigators, for then there will be fewer despondent 
 and discouraged souls in this world, and more who are 
 happy and contented. 
 
 ''Let your light so shine that others may see your good 
 work." 
 
CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 THE USE OF ELECTRICITY. 
 
 The importance of the use of electricity in facial work 
 can hardly be overestimated. This wonderful force can be 
 utilized in so many ways for conditions so dissimilar that 
 many people have been deterred from attempting to use it 
 at all, feeling that the course of study necessary would be 
 far beyond their means. Books of instruction possessed no 
 attraction for those who would learn at home, as the terms 
 used to describe the various peculiarities have been too 
 complicated for the ordinary students. 
 
 In describing the use of electricity as of service to the 
 worker who wishes to benefit her fellow being by removing 
 disfiguring moles, hairy growths or bleach the skin by 
 means of cataphoresis, care has been taken to use only the 
 simplest expressions and to explain as clearly as possible 
 the most practical method of obtaining the desired effect. 
 The use of the electric current should be understood by 
 every one who attempts to do good work in massage or scalp 
 treatment, for by it results of the most pleasing nature are 
 obtained. 
 
 In view of the many misapprehensions regarding this 
 universal remedy, it may be well to explain by means of an 
 experiment familiar to all how easily fhis current can be 
 produced. When a person walks rapidly over a woolen 
 carpet or shuffles the feet quickly over any substance of this 
 kind, and then touches a dry, stationary object or the dry 
 skin of another person, a spark results, passing between 
 the two points of contact. The friction upon the carpet 
 charges the body with one kind of electricity, while the 
 stationary object is charged with the opposite .kind. 
 
THE SKIM. 
 
 I Mil 
 
 This current may also be produced in Other manners, 
 and as it is necessary to have it furnished continuously, as 
 well as to provide means to convey it from this point in a 
 uniform way by a proper medium, experiment has resulted 
 in the invention of batteries. In these the current is either 
 caused by the immersion of certain metals in fluid or by 
 the contact of certain metals in which the chemical changes 
 resulting' from union are powerful enough to create an 
 electrical disturbance that can be utilized for the purpose 
 of treatment, and from whence it may be conveyed by means 
 of the conducting cords. In the experiment mentioned the 
 body from which the electric spark originated would repre- 
 sent the positive pole, while that to which it was directed 
 would be the negative. 
 
 The simplest form of galvanic cell 
 consists of two pieces of dissimilar 
 metals, partially immersed in diluted 
 sulphuric acid. The illustration shows 
 a single galvanic cell composed of 
 zinc and carbon plates. When these 
 plates are insulated from each other 
 there is no action betweed them; but 
 when they be connected by a wire, chemical action at 
 once begins at the surface of the zinc, electricity is generat- 
 ed, which passes across the liquid to the carbon. The zinc 
 is known as the negative element and the carbon as the 
 positive element. The current of electricity passes through 
 the fluid from the zinc to the carbon and from the carbon 
 passes along the wire back to the zinc, thus completing the 
 circuit. The current generated in the battery cell always 
 takes this direction, hence the current from the carbon pole- 
 is always positive and the current from the zinc pole is 
 always negative. If this fact is kept well in mind there 
 
110 THE SKIN. 
 
 need never be any doubt or fear about using either the posi- 
 >r the negative, whichever may be desired or indicated 
 as necessary in any particular treatment. 
 
 When six cells or twelve cells are used the current is 
 continuous from the zinc of the last cell of the series, wheth- 
 er it be six or twelve, through the fluid to the carbon, and 
 by means of the wire to the zinc of the next cell, and so on 
 through the entire series, finally emerging from the carbon 
 of the first cell through the copper wire back to the zinc of 
 the last cell, six or twelve, as the case may be. Now if the 
 copper wire connecting carbon of cell "one" with the zinc 
 of cell "twelve" be cut and a living body (the patient) be 
 placed in the circuit, the patient then becomes a part of the 
 circuit; if the right hand is holding the wire from the 
 carbon, then the positive current is entering the body 
 through the right hand and the negative current is passing 
 out of the body through the left hand and back through the 
 wire to the battery. Or, as in practice, if the sponge or 
 inert pole is connected with the wire or conducting cord 
 from the carbon and the needle or active pole is connected 
 with the conducting cord from the zinc, then the needle be- 
 comes the negative pole and is properly connected for nega- 
 tive electrolysis. 
 
 The quantity of current from one cell is as great as the 
 quantity from six or twelve cells ; but the penetrating power 
 is increased by each additional cell; and just as we add 
 two or four or six horses to overcome the resistance of mud 
 or hill or heavy weight of load, so we add two or three or 
 six or twelve cells to overcome the resistance of the human 
 body and secure sufficient force or push (electro-motive 
 force — E. M. F.) to force the current through the resistance 
 interposed. 
 
 For practical work a good battery is necessary, and 
 
THE SKIN. Ill 
 
 as there are many forms advocated, it may be well to state 
 the points to be considered. In all work of this kind it is 
 not only necessary to secure a continuous current, but also 
 to have it as painless as possible. 
 
 In dry cell batteries the current is all that can be desired 
 for a time, but it becomes weaker constantly, thus making it 
 necessary to renew the cells at frequent intervals. While 
 the original cost of the battery may be small, the item of 
 buying cells is one to be considered, as well as the dis- 
 advantage of sending for them if away from a large center. 
 The delays occasioned when it is impossible to procure the 
 cells readily often make it most embarrassing for the oper- 
 ator. 
 
 The street current, advocated so enthusiastically, pos- 
 sesses one serious drawback, as the high voltage makes it so 
 much more painful that some patients are unable to endure 
 the sensation, thus making it unfeasible for many kinds of 
 work. Then, too, unless the current is direct it cannot be 
 used under any circumstances, as the alternations would be 
 too frequent. 
 
 The wet cell battery would therefore seem the most prac- 
 tical for all purposes. In this form the current is produced 
 by immersing the plates of zinc and carbon into a liquid 
 called a bichromate solution. A small cup accompanying the 
 battery shows just how much each cell requires and the com- 
 partments are filled accordingly. The most useful form is 
 that in which both the galvanic and Faradic current may be 
 obtained from the same battery. 
 
 The galvanic or constant current is always indicated in 
 the work of destroying the various growths, while the 
 R radic or interrupted current is advocated for its stimulat- 
 ing effect in massage, scalp treatment or anything in which 
 stimulation is considered necessary. 
 
112 THE SKIN. 
 
 The author has found that so great is the difference in 
 the capacity of people for enduring the current that a bat- 
 tery of twelve cells is the most practical for everyday use 
 in the treatment of facial defects. In almost all cases 
 at least four cells will be required, while for the removal 
 of superfluous hair the number of cells varies with the size 
 of the hair, and in work on moles and other treatments in 
 which the galvanic current may be indicated, the number of 
 cells necessary may be six, eight, or even ten or eleven. 
 Hence the author has found the twelve-cell combined gal- 
 vanic and Faradic battery to be not only the most practical, 
 but also the most economical, and as the Faradic current is 
 now so frequently used, it is really securing two batteries in 
 one at an ordinary cost. 
 
 In the use of electrolysis rnany points are to be consid- 
 
 Mclntosh Galvanic and Faradic Battery, 
 ered, not only regarding the peculiarities of temperament 
 and sensibility, but also in respect to the work itself. The 
 current that is painless to one may be unendurable to an- 
 other. Different sections of the same face also vary in this 
 respect, the region about the nose and mouth being particu- 
 larly susceptible, while the middle of the cheeks and chin 
 are usually operated upon with no difficulty. Another singu- 
 larity is observed in the manner in which the same current 
 
I HE SKIN. II.; 
 
 affects the same person on different days. For instance, in 
 the work o\ removing moles, six cells maj be used easilj 
 on Tuesday, and perhaps on Thursda) onl) five can be tol 
 erated. Hence the careful operator will begin every treat 
 rhent with a weak current to avoid the danger of administer- 
 ing a shock. 
 
 One of the most difficult phases encountered is not in 
 the work of removing the blemishes, but in refusing to re- 
 move many hairs or to work long on a mole at any one 
 time. The patient frequently is so overjoyed at the pros- 
 pect of improvement that she obstinately insists upon all 
 necessary work being finished within a few days. The only 
 recourse found is in the use of a firm refusal, not only for 
 the sake of the patient, but also for the operator, as it is 
 absolutely impossible for any one to work long at a time 
 on anything so trying as the removal of superfluous hair and 
 be satisfied with the results. One-half hour is quite suffi- 
 cient to devote to any case at one time. Of course, there are 
 instances where one, two and even three hours' work has 
 been done, but the hairs have been prominent and widely 
 separated and the operator has possessed unusually steady 
 nerves. Then, too, the danger of producing a serious in- 
 flammation must ever be considered, and this injury may 
 easily be avoided by using the current in a conservative man- 
 ner. 
 
 Many questions are asked concerning .scars, and 
 course there are instances cited where the disfiguring white 
 marks were more of a blemish than the hair itself. Care and 
 management will, however, almost invariably prevent any 
 such catastrophe, for although destruction of tissue must 
 result in a scar of some kind, the mark is so minute that onl) 
 the closest investigation will reveal it when the proper meth- 
 od has been used, and caution in using the needle for an) 
 
114 THE SKIN. 
 
 length of time in the same location has been observed. 
 Then, too, there must be attention to the face immediately 
 after the use of the needle in the way of applying ointments 
 and dusting powder to allay the inflammation. 
 
 In one instance where a growth fully as heavy as an 
 ordinary beard was removed, there was manifested a ten- 
 dency to intense inflammation. The parts festered, and it 
 seemed impossible to proceed. The result, was that so little 
 work could be done at a time that the patient became dis- 
 couraged and declared she would employ a razor or a depila- 
 tory. The experiment was then tried of massaging the face 
 well after each use of the needle, using for the purpose a 
 zinc ointment and dusting on zinc powder afterward. The 
 patient was instructed not to touch the spots excepting in 
 rubbing on ointment, and under no consideration to use soap 
 or water or to remove the tiny crust that invariably forms 
 after the use of the needle. The effect w r as most happy, for 
 not only was the inflammation banished, but the entire 
 growth was removed without a scar. 
 
 The question of the reappearance of hair is rather diffi- 
 cult to answer. Given the ordinary case, the percentage of 
 hairs returning should be less than five per cent. In some 
 instances this is, of course, a small estimate, but in the 
 main it is an average usually observed. Then, too, one can 
 never be certain that the same hairs return. They may be 
 others springing up in the same neighborhood, or they may 
 be hairs that have been broken off and partly dislodged by 
 means of depilatories, plasters or tweezers. Nearly every 
 one who is so afflicted has tried some one of the many meth- 
 ods advertised, before resorting to the electric needle for 
 permanent relief. At any rate, no matter what may be the 
 cause of the return, the remedy is easily used and. the effect 
 of work conducted for a sufficiently extended period is to 
 permanently abolish the growth. 
 
THE SKIN. ii, 
 
 In cases where eruptions are complicated with the 
 growth it is well to cure the eruption before attempting to 
 remove the hair, unless there exists a chronic inflammation, 
 such as found in Acne Rosacea, where the nose, chin and 
 parts of the cheeks appear a wine color or bright red nearl) 
 all i^t the time, while all of the tiny blood vessels are greatl) 
 distended. In this condition the current may he used with 
 benefit, for it will not only remove the hair, hut will also 
 reduce the existing inflammation. 
 
 The w T ork of removing superfluous hair is, of course, 
 trying, but it is also remunerative, and as the demand for a 
 knowledge of this process is continually growing, the mod- 
 ern operator must at least have an understanding of this 
 method. All necessary accessories should he obtained and 
 used as directed. Each case should he studied and work 
 done accordingly, bearing in mind always that a painstaking 
 effort will ever produce excellent results. The experience 
 of a few weeks will convince any bright woman that the 
 field is not only a good one, uncrowded, but is also extremely 
 interesting as well as decidedly beneficial from a financial 
 point of view. 
 
 Before attempting to charge and use a zinc-carbon, 
 bichromate, fluid battery the beginner will do we'll to heed 
 the following directions: It is quite as necessar) to know 
 how to make the fluid and fill the cell as it is to make the 
 proper connections and proceed with the work. Much diffi- 
 culty may be avoided by sufficient care in mastering these 
 preliminary details. 
 
 The battery fluid is best made by means of the following 
 directions. 
 
 To make the battery fluid: I> — Sulphuric acid (com 
 mercial), 3 fluid oz. ; powd. bichromate of soda, 3 0Z.; 
 water, 16 fluid oz. ; bisulphate of mercury, 2 drachms. Mi- 
 
116 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 solve the bisulphate of mercury in the water; then add the 
 bichromate of soda. Slowly pour in the sulphuric acid and 
 stir until the ingredients are dissolved, then allow the liquid 
 to cool, as the mingling of the acid and water produces heat, 
 and if the mixture is used when warm it injures the bat- 
 tery. 
 
 The bisulphate of mercury keeps the zincs well amalga- 
 mated. 
 
 Figure 1. 
 
 Figure 2. 
 
 Fig. I shows the hard rubber plate of a section (on the 
 under surface of which is cemented a sheet of soft rub- 
 ber). The binding posts which project through the 
 hard and soft rubber screw into the brass piece holding 
 the zinc and carbon couples. The rubber plate on which 
 the couples are clamped projects over on one side enough 
 to cover the cells when the zinc and carbon plates are placed 
 in the drip cups. When the cells are not in use and the lid 
 of the battery box is closed, it presses on the spring handle 
 of the section (Fig. i) and holds the soft rubber firmly over 
 the cells and drip cup. By this arrangement the hydrostat is 
 made water-tight. 
 
THE SKIN. 111 
 
 Fig, 2 shows a section of six cells and a drip cup made 
 of one piece of hard vulcanized rubber. The drip cup is to 
 
 receive the zinc and carbon couples when not in n 
 
 By the aid oi a simple current selector an\ number of 
 cells can he used. See cut. 
 
 To use six galvanic cells lift section 1 and remove the 
 elements from the drip cup; carry forward and place them 
 in the galvanic cells; then connect one conducting cord with 
 Pi and the other with N6 (all parts marked P are positive 
 and N negative). 
 
 To use twelve cells lift section 2 from the drip cup, move 
 it forward near section 1 and place the elements in the gal- 
 vanic cells; connect N6 with Fy by means of the horizontal 
 bar and the conducting cords, one with Pi and the other 
 with N12. 
 
 How to Detect the Galvanic Current: Put one sponge, 
 well wet, in the palm of the hand and let the other he held 
 between the thumb and the first finger of the same hand. A 
 slight pricking sensation will be experienced. Those onl) 
 accustomed to the induced or Faradic current will be disap- 
 pointed to find the galvanic current causes only a slight 
 pricking or burning sensation, or perhaps a slight dizziness 
 when applied to the head. A galvanic current that can 
 scarcely be felt in the hand may be too strong to apply to 
 the head or neck. Acute sensation or shock from the gal- 
 vanic current is only experienced when the current is sud 
 denly broken. 
 
 The bifurcated or forked cord is for the purpose of pre 
 venting a shock while changing to a less or greater number 
 of cells while using the galvanic current, lor example: 
 Suppose you are using seven cells. One of the hi furcated 
 ends would be connected with cell No. 7 and the other end 
 hanging loose. If you wish to use, say twelve cells, take 
 
118 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 up the loose end of the bifurcated cord and connect it with 
 No. 12 before you pull the other end out from No. 7. Thus 
 all shock is avoided in the change. The same method of 
 procedure is necessary to prevent shock when reducing the 
 number of cells in use. 
 
 To use the Faradic section of the battery holding the coil 
 lift the section marked O from the cell and drip cup, fill the 
 large cell half full of battery fluid, reverse the section and 
 
 Figure 3. 
 
 Figure 4. 
 
 place the elements in the large cell C and the battery will 
 commence to work at once, which may be known by the 
 buzzing of the rheotome. To obtain the primary current 
 insert the tips of the conducting cord in posts P and N, on 
 either side of "prim." To obtain the secondary current in- 
 sert the cord tips in posts N and P on either side of "Sec." 
 Either current can be made stronger by drawing out the 
 shield in the coil. 
 
 To connect the coil with one or more galvanic cells : In 
 a case of emergency, like an attempt to resuscitate a person 
 from drowning, where greater intensity is needed than one 
 
NIK SKIN. 119 
 
 cell will give, the coil can be connected with the galvanic 
 cells of section 1 b\ means of the long, spiral wires, as fol- 
 lows: Reverse the coil section, immerse the element 
 
 section I and connect post A near the coil with post l'i on 
 section T, and post B on coil with post 2, 3, | >, 1 >n 
 
 section 1. 
 
 Sometimes the inexperienced operator will say: "I hav( 
 fluid made according to formula, but I cannot obtain a cur- 
 rent even from twelve cells. When I immerse the elements 
 in the fluid the liquid boils or froths and the batter) 
 hot, the zincs are rapidly eaten up, but I get no current." 
 When such conditions are observed it shows that the battery 
 fluid is not made according to formula, but contain- 
 much acid. When the battery fluid contains large excess 
 of acid the zinc is rapidly destroyed, the fluid bubbles or boils 
 and becomes hot. Hydrogen gas is generated, but no elec- 
 tricity. The remedy in such a case is to add one-third to 
 one-half its volume of water to the battery fluid. 
 
 Diluted acid acts very slowly upon the zinc; there i> n<> 
 violent action; the fluid does not become hot; there is verj 
 little generation of hydrogen gas, but a good and constant 
 current of galvanic electricity. 
 
 The Mcintosh galvanic battery is constructed with its 
 metallic cord tip fitting firmly into the metallic binding post, 
 which in its turn is screwed firmly into the metallic bridge, 
 and this bridge securely fastened by metallic connection to 
 the zinc and carbon plates, so that when the zinc and carbon 
 elements are in good condition, and the fluid properly com- 
 pounded, and the conducting cords all right, it is impossible 
 to avoid getting a satisfactory current through tin- elec 
 trodes when the elements are immersed in the fluid. 
 
CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 THE REMOVAL OF SUPERFLUOUS HAIR. 
 
 The galvanic current is always indicated in the work of 
 removing blemishes, such as superfluous hair, moles or 
 warts, as well as in treating enlarged blood vessels and in 
 curing the vascular naevi. In the work of removing the 
 hair at least four cells will be required to begin with, while 
 ordinarily the current from six will be used. It is well to 
 have both sections of the battery filled so that more cells can 
 easily be brought into circuit as required. In getting the 
 battery ready for use the compartments are filled by means 
 of the cup with the liquid called a bichromate solution. This 
 liquid is an acid that is very destructive, hence it is well 
 to have the battery placed on a large tray of metal and while 
 pouring in the liquid a blotter should be kept in the other 
 hand ready to at once remove any of the drops. As soon 
 as the compartments are filled the zinc and carbon plates are 
 immersed in the liquid, the small metallic bar is fastened at 
 the back connecting one section with the other, and the 
 galvanic portion is ready for use. 
 
 As a measure of economy in conserving the strength of 
 the battery it will be well at the commencement of the treat- 
 ment to allow the second section of cells to remain resting in 
 the drip cup until it be found that more than six cells will be 
 required, then immerse the elements of the second section 
 in the fluid and fasten the metallic connecting bar into its 
 place, and the relay of six fresh cells is at once brought into 
 readiness for use. 
 
 The greatest demand will be in the removal of superflu- 
 ous hair. In this work not only the galvanic current is re- 
 
 
L22 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 quired, but also a needle holder, needles of various sizes, 
 made preferably of either gold or iridio-platinum, a small 
 
 Hard Rubber Needle Holder. 
 
 pair of forceps and either a magnifying glass, an electric 
 headlight or both. In Figure 12 the use of the lamp is clear- 
 ly indicated. If it has been impossible to obtain instruction 
 
 siait 
 
 Hard Rubber Needle Holder. 
 
 in this work the beginner who wishes to attempt the process 
 will do well to practice first upon the coarse hairs found on 
 the arms and hands of those inclined to this growth. The 
 
 Depilatory Forceps. 
 
 first trial will show that practice is the most essential point in 
 good work, for not only a knowledge of the proper proce- 
 dure is required, but also a sure eye and a steady hand. 
 
 Magnifying Glass. 
 
 Before beginning work the patient should be placed in a 
 comfortable position, as near a clear, strong light as possible. 
 
Mir SKIN. 
 
 I ' ! 
 
 1 1 the day is dull and the light uncertain, the head lamp must 
 be used, otherwise the magnifying glass attached to a head 
 baud will be found of great service. If the lamp is era 
 ployed the long cord at the back is attached to the street cur 
 rent and managed in the usual way. A slightly recumbent 
 position is advisable for the patient, as in this way all the 
 muscles are more or less relaxed and the tension is not 
 great. The cord to be attached to the negative pole is p 
 
 Head Lamp for 110 Volt Current. 
 
 in the section marked N, according to the number ol cells 
 that are to be used. If four, then the cord is inserted in 
 the second opening from the front, as shown in Figure i - 
 The cord attached to the positive pole is inserted in a similar 
 position in the section marked i\ and is attached either to the 
 carbon disc or sponge electrode and placed in the lap ol the 
 patient. 
 
 The object in using a needle attached to the electric cur- 
 
124 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 iiriiiiiiHfiH 1 " 
 
 Magnifying Glass, mounted on 
 Head Band. 
 
 rent is to destroy the tissue 
 composing the hair papillae. 
 Naturally, a small portion 
 of the surrounding tissue 
 must be affected by the cur- 
 rent, and the problem con- 
 fronting the operator is how 
 to remove the hair growth 
 with as little destruction of 
 tissue as possible. It has 
 been found by experiment 
 that the negative current is 
 by far the best for this pur- 
 pose, and hence it is always 
 employed, as the effect on the 
 tissue is not only less severe, 
 but the danger of scarring is not nearly so great. 
 
 Note — When the positive pole is used, it is essential 
 that the needle be either gold (not gold plated) or plati- 
 num, as these metals are not attacked or corroded by the 
 current. If a steel needle is used as the positive pole, a de- 
 posit of iron salt will be left in the hair follicle, and a black 
 scar will inevitably result. An additional reason for giving 
 preference always to the negative current is that negative 
 electrolysis produces alkaline hydrates, destroys less tissue 
 and allows the needle to be easily withdrawn. Positive elec- 
 trolysis, on the contrary, releases oxygen acids, coagulates 
 the albumen, destroys tissue and causes the needle to ad- 
 here, making it difficult to withdraw the needle without 
 lacerating the tissue. 
 
 In order to destroy the hair, it is necessary to enter the 
 follicle with a bulbous or pointed needle, the majority of 
 the operators preferring the bulbous variety. The depth 
 
THE SKIN 12 
 
 ()i the follicle varies greatly, in some instanc not 
 
 more than one thirty-second of an inch, while in others it 
 is fully one-quarter of an inch. In finding the follicle il 
 
 will be necessary to insert the needle as closelj as possible 
 by the side of the hair. The difference in the sensation ol 
 touch when the right path has been entered is usuallj suffi 
 
 cient proof of success. 
 
 At any rate, when everything i s in readiness the needle 
 
 is inserted as directed, and is continued until it me< 
 slight obstacle. There it must pause, while the patient 
 grasps the positive electrode in her hand, thus completing 
 the circuit. If the follicle has been entered, in about twenty 
 seconds bubbles of hydrogen gas will commence to appear 
 about the site of the entrance. In fifty or sixty seconds the 
 hair should be grasped by the epilation forceps and a gentle 
 pressure exerted. If the process of destruction is complete 
 the hair will come away instantly. If not, the current should 
 be continued, and at the end of a minute another attempt 
 should be made. If the hair comes out easily now it may 
 be inferred that the work has been properly done. In case 
 it does not come out at the last efifort it is well to remove 
 it forcibly and then enter the follicle with the needle for 
 about half a minute in a further attempt to destroy the 
 hair. Practice on the coarse hair of the hands will teach 
 more than words can, for in this work an intuitive knowl- 
 edge as well as a delicate touch are wonderfully g 
 guides. 
 
 The selection of a needle is an important item in this 
 operation, and the point should always be examine* 1 with a 
 strong glass that w r e may be able to ascertain its shape. An 
 ordinary jeweler's broach will do if the point be ground off 
 on an oil stone, and its temper drawn by heating, but the 
 bulbous pointed needle, as recommended by the late Dr. 
 
126 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 P. S. Haves, a magnified drawing of which is here shown 
 in Figure A, is best suited for the work. There are several 
 very important reasons why a sharp-pointed needle should 
 
 Figure A. 
 
 not be used : First, there is a depression in the epidermis at 
 the base of every hair, very plainly shown in Figure B. The 
 bulbous-pointed needle will always find this depression, 
 while the sharp-pointed needle is just as liable to miss it. 
 and not get into the hair follicle at all. Again, the hair fol- 
 licles are not always the same depth or the same direction, 
 but the sheath surrounding the hair is tough ; in fact, it 
 takes considerable pressure to force the bulbous-pointed 
 needle through, and it naturally will find the 
 proper depth, while, as Dr. Hayes remarks", 
 u the sharp needle would, in many cases, 
 penetrate the walls of the follicle and wander 
 into the tissue far from the desired point, 
 and failure rather than success would be 
 recorded." Many hairs are removed with 
 sharp-pointed needles, and many writers ad- 
 vocate their use, but success is purely acci- 
 dental. Figure B shows a magnified hair 
 shaft and follicle into which a sharp-pointed 
 needle has been plunged and has not entered 
 the depression at the free surface of the skin, 
 but which has accidentally penetrated the 
 sheath from without and gained access 
 to the papilla. Of course, such hair will be permanently de- 
 stroyed. By referring again to Figure B, it will be noticed 
 that the sheath is narrowest at the top or at the point of 
 
 Figure B. 
 
THE SKIN. i •, 
 
 insertion of the hair shaft into the epidermis, which shows 
 the necessity oi actuall) following the hair shaft with the 
 needle in order to be certain of entering the Follicle. 
 
 Again, the bulbous needle presents a larger surface with 
 
 in the hair follicles, the benefit of which is apparent. 
 
 The illustration — Figure u — shows how the work may 
 be performed. The connections in this case are for four 
 cells. The third cord, or section of the negative cord hail- 
 ing- clown, may be used to bring another cell into circuit 
 without disturbing the other connections. The head lamp 
 is used in this instance, as the light thrown on the face is so 
 brilliant that fewer errors in placing the needle will be 
 made, while the ease with which it may be attached and 
 worn makes it possible for the operator to utilize many 
 dark days for working purposes. 
 
 Caution must be observed in several particulars in this 
 work, and it may be well to impress upon the beginner that, 
 first of all, it is wiser to use a weak current for a long time 
 than a strong current for a short time. In removing hair 
 it is never advisable to continue the current for more than 
 a minute or a minute and a quarter, unless the hair is very 
 coarse and bristly. Of course, in this instance it must be 
 used as needed. Too many insertions in the same sections 
 should be avoided in order to prevent an inflammation, thus 
 making work impossible for several days. By using dis- 
 cretion in selecting different places upon the face the work 
 may be continued for at least twice as long as where it is 
 confined to one portion, and treatments may be given in this 
 manner as often as every other day until the hairs at 
 moved. 
 
 After a sitting has been ended, and here it is well to 
 repeat that one-half hour should be the a duration 
 
 for both patient and operator, the portions worked I 
 
128 THE SKIN. 
 
 should be well massaged with zinc ointment, or if none is 
 obtainable, the acne cream may be utilized. In this massage 
 care must be taken to use only the zinc ointment made for 
 this purpose, as otherwise the effect will not be as good. 
 After the flesh has been well manipulated the zinc powder 
 may be dusted on, and then all that does not cling, removed 
 bv drawing a soft cloth or bit of cotton softly over the face. 
 The patient should have it thoroughly impressed upon her 
 mind that no soap or water should touch the places worked 
 upon until the tiny crust has disappeared. Night and morn- 
 ing the ointment may be rubbed in well, and if it is neces- 
 sary to cleanse the face the lettuce cream may be used 
 about these portions, using water, of course, on the rest 
 of the skin. 
 
 The importance of this precaution cannot be overesti- 
 mated, for the zinc ointment certainly possesses a marvelous- 
 ly soothing influence on any surface that has been subjected 
 to the electric current, and in the author's experience, where- 
 ever care in this respect as well as in the use of the needle 
 has existed, there has never been one case of scarring. 
 
CHAPTER X\ III. 
 
 THE TREATMENT OF MOLES, WARTS AND \.\i.\i. 
 
 The removal of pigmented elevations upon the skin is 
 one for which the demand is continually growing, The use 
 
 of caustics of various kinds was, in former years, quite suf 
 ficient to remove these disfiguring portions, but as the de- 
 struction of tissue could not be limited to the affected area, 
 the resulting scars deterred many from the attempt. In tin- 
 use of electricity for this purpose, if sufficient care is mani- 
 fested, the growths may be easily removed with little pain, 
 and will leave but a small pit to mark the site. In some in- 
 stances not even a depression can be found, and the skin 
 appears perfectly smooth. 
 
 There are so many varieties of moles that it will be 
 simply confusing to mention them, describing peculiarities 
 of structure and appearance. Xo matter which variety is 
 found, the treatment is the same, and the negative current 
 will be tised for the purpose of removal. In Figure [2 the 
 process is clearly illustrated, showing not only the moles, 
 but also long, bristly hair, making the treatment more diffi- 
 cult. 
 
 In every case of this description the hairs must be re 
 moved in the manner described before working on the moles, 
 as otherwise the use of the current might destroy them, and 
 if allowed to remain, trouble could result from the hairs 
 festering. When there are a great many bristles it is well 
 to limit the first treatment to the removal of all that will 
 come out easily. The next treatment may be given in two 
 days and the balance removed, and on the third the work 
 will be done as though the mole was to be freshly treated. 
 
3 
 
 2 
 
 b J 
 
THE SKIN. LSI 
 
 This is, of course, unless a crust or scab has formed, In 
 
 this case no more work can be done until it has gone. The 
 use ^i the zinc ointment at home will hasten this process and 
 
 the patient may he told to return as soon as the cmsl has 
 disappeared. In some instances the mole will also have 
 vanished and no further work will be necessary. 
 
 In actual practice at least six or seven cells arc required, 
 and in many instances ten and even twelve will need to be 
 employed. The illustration shows hut four, as it is wiser 
 to begin with a small number until one has found out just 
 how many can be used without inconvenience. The patient 
 will hold the positive electrode and the operator will insert 
 the needle into the mole in a vertical direction, allowing it 
 to remain for about a half minute at each insertion and 
 making from six to eight of them. If the current has been 
 strong enough bubbles of hydrogen gas will be observed 
 and the mole will appear blanched. Even the darkest mole 
 will change during this work. If the surrounding flesh 
 has not assumed a pinkish cast during this work the needle 
 may now be thrust through in a horizontal position, having 
 it nearly level with the skin as possible, and leaving it 
 for twenty or thirty seconds. This process may be continued 
 for two or three minutes, choosing a different point for en- 
 trance each time and watching carefully to see that the nor- 
 mal skin does not become reddened. As a rule, the work 
 on one mole at any one time should not exceed five minutes, 
 unless it is extremely large. In ordinary cases three treat 
 ments will be sufficient to cause the growth to disappear. 
 leaving but a red mark where the mole has been. By rub- 
 bing with zinc ointment this color will gradually fade away. 
 
 If the current has been continued too long and the m 
 flammation seems difficult to subdue, it is wise to defer fur- 
 ther treatments for at least one week. In inserting the 
 
132 THE SKIN. 
 
 needle after such an experience it is better to use a weak 
 current, observing the mole and the surrounding flesh to 
 see how it is affected. If the skin becomes a deep crimson 
 do not attempt any work, but wait until it may be used with- 
 out this effect. The scab or crust that forms on the moles 
 is either very light or a dark brown and may take some 
 weeks to disappear. As in the treatment of superfluous 
 hair, the patients should be warned against attempting to 
 remove this crust and should be cautioned against irritat- 
 ing the skin in any way. 
 
 In the work on warty growths it is wise to use a larger 
 needle, employing either the gold or the iridio-platinum, as 
 the inflammation seems not to be so great when these metals 
 are utilized. The dark, soft moles and the pinkish va- 
 riety respond more readily to treatment than others, though, 
 of course, there are also exceptions to this rule, and it is un- 
 safe to promise results in any given number of treatments. 
 In many cases two or three treatments have been all that 
 was necessary, and in others eight and even ten and twelve 
 have been found requisite. 
 
 Of course, one is positive that a thick, warty growth will 
 be found more difficult to remove, and will take a stronger 
 current as well as more treatments, but cases that are espe- 
 cially obstinate are so often seen that the operator will do 
 well to explain this peculiarity to each new patient, thus ex- 
 citing no false hopes and running no risk of disappointing 
 them. The statement that the moles may positively be re- 
 moved though the number of treatments cannot be told is 
 usually sufficient to encourage a desire to have the work 
 done. 
 
 Nervous patients must be especially cautioned against 
 touching the portions operated upon, as in this manner 
 many scars are caused. The positive request that nothing 
 
nil- SKIN. i • 
 
 but the ointment touch the spots will usually result in a 
 small pu to mark the site of the mole. This -p<>! will 
 gradually grow smaller until in a short time it is barel) 
 
 perceptible. 
 
 Warts are removed in the same manner as moles, hut 
 as the substance composing them is dry and hard to pent 
 trate, it is wiser to use a larger needle, while tin- current 
 may be employed for a longer time. Ten and even fifteen 
 minutes may be employed in the treatment of large growth-. 
 and the same rule that applies to the moles may be used here, 
 for as soon as the surrounding tissue is at all affected tin- 
 use of the current must be stopped. 
 
 In connection with the removal of moles and warts it is 
 well to be extremely cautious in the use of the right pole. 
 There are several ways of telling which is right, aside from 
 the fact that the sections are marked either negative or 
 positive, but as too many directions are more confusing than 
 none, the ones that follow will be sufficient. With the nega- 
 tive pole, one may observe the ease with which it enters or is 
 removed from a growth. Another proof is found in the 
 bubbles of hydrogen gas forming about the needle. Tin 
 use of the positive pole is shown by the way in which the 
 tissue clings to the needle, and if the steel needle is used, by 
 the black mark that is left in the skin, caused by the oxida- 
 tion of the metal. Thus a careless operator may remove 
 a growth, but leave in its place a mark that shows tin error 
 in treatment. 
 
 In the work of removing nsevi, or wine marks, one <>t 
 two methods may be employed. If the discoloration is 
 small, the platinum needle may be used, attached, of con 
 to the negative pole. This needle should he inserted first 
 in the center of the growth, and then at least five punctures 
 should be made in the tiny capillaries which radiate from 
 
i;:i 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 this source. Should the growth be larger, the second 
 method may be employed. This calls for the use of the 
 needle disc, and in this method die entire area is treated by 
 a single application of the numerous points. In some in- 
 stances, much blood escapes from the tiny apertures. This 
 generally lasts but for a few moments, and is of no conse- 
 quence. If, however, it seems desirable to alleviate this con- 
 dition, the application of the positive electrode by means of 
 a platinum needle will almost instantly produce the desired 
 result. 
 
 MMNTOSH B.i.O.CO. 
 
 CHICAGO. 
 
 Needle Disc. 
 
 For the removal of "Pigmentary Naevus" or wine marks. 
 
 IMPORTANT FEATURES OF AN OUTFIT. 
 
 The three features which are considered by most derma- 
 tologists in the selection of a battery and outfit for this class 
 of work are, in their respective importance ; Reliability, sim- 
 plicity and portability. 
 
 The twelve-cell fluid battery must ever hold the palm 
 for entire reliability, but there are many operators who 
 will insist upon the convenience of the simple and more 
 easily portable dry cell battery, and to all such we commend 
 the Mcintosh dry cell electrolysis battery. In designing 
 this battery all of these points have received due considera- 
 tion. It is fitted with six Columbia No. 4 dry cells — cells 
 which we have found to be the most reliable. With ordinary 
 use and proper care they should last for from six months 
 to a year. 
 
nil-: skin 
 
 
 DIRE( i [( 
 
 The sponge electrode, well moistened, should b 
 tached to one end of the conducting cord, and the tip on 
 the opposite end of the c<>nl should be inserted in th< 
 marked + (plus). This sign always indicates the positive 
 
 Mcintosh Dry Cell Electrolysis Battery. 
 
 The needle holder should he attached to the conducting 
 
 cord and the free end of the cord should be attached to 
 
 the post corresponding to the number of cells u is desired to 
 
 use; post "i" for one cell, post "2" for two cells, post 3 
 
136 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 for three cells, etc. It will be found that three or four cells 
 are sufficient to perform any ordinary work. When both 
 the sponge electrode and the needle come in contact with 
 the patient the circuit is completed. 
 
CHAPTER XIX 
 
 Bl INCHING THE SK I \, DIS< 0L0RATH I 
 
 CURRENT. 
 
 A most mortifying condition, and one Erequentlj en 
 
 countered, is that in which the nose assumes a most decided 
 ly red hue, varying from the lightest tint to deep purple. 
 Close examination generally reveals a network of bright cap 
 Maries traversing the nose and cheeks for a shorl distance. 
 The use of the electric needle is here found most excellent 
 in results and it should be employed without hesitation. In 
 this treatment the opinions of the various operators have 
 been far from uniform, as some insist that the positive pole 
 shall be employed, while others are equally firm in their 
 praise of the negative. However, in actual practice, the au- 
 thor has found that the negative pole filled all requirements. 
 It is best used by introducing the needle into the blood ves- 
 sel and allowing it to penetrate a certain distance, then 
 closing the circuit as usual by having the patient clasp the 
 positive electrode in her hand. It is wisest to choose the 
 largest vessel in beginning the work, as the destruction of 
 this will also affect the tiny branches, and fewer insertions 
 will thus be required. But a short treatment will be neces 
 sary for cases of this kind, and in no other trouble is the 
 benefit more readily seen. 
 
 When the flesh seems reddened and inflamed without the 
 dilation of the capillaries, much can be done by applying 
 the electrodes as shown in Figure [3. The absorbent cotton 
 is moistened before being placed in the electrodes, and the 
 current may be continued as long and as strong as the pa 
 tient can endure it. The skin will become extremely red 
 
u 
 
 cc 
 
 ^ 
 
 T— 1 
 
 c 
 
 
 rt 
 
 •— 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 C$ 
 
 bi 
 
 
 
 fe 
 
 <L> 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 bx. 
 
 
 c 
 
THE SKIN. i. 
 
 after a time, and the burning sensation will be experienced. 
 Ten minutes is long enough for a treatment, and for some 
 time after it is ended the redness will persist, but will 
 finally give place to a much lighter appearance for some 
 
 hours. Treatments for this trouble should be given at 
 least every other day for two or three weeks until the im- 
 provement has become permanent. 
 
 This work is especially beneficial after blackhead- and 
 pimples have been removed from the free, and it is n< 
 sary to improve the nutrition of the skin. In aciu 
 this method is much used and is extremely efficacious. ( W 
 course, if the capillaries are dilated they are to be treated 
 as directed, and the bi-polar method used afterward. 
 
 In the use of the electrodes upon the face, or near tin- 
 head care must be taken, as in other cases, to commence 
 with fewer cells, as some people are so sensitive that they 
 complain of dizziness when electricity is used. If the pa- 
 tient is extremely nervous and is subject to headache, one 
 of the electrodes may be placed at the back of the neck and 
 the other upon the face, thus causing- a general as well as 
 local effect, and sometimes improving the physical condi- 
 tion as well as the nutrition of the skin. 
 
 HOW TO REMOVE DISCOLORATIONS 
 
 Many times there will be a demand for something thai 
 will quickly whiten or bleach some portion i)i the skin, and 
 the use of electricity has in such instances been particularly 
 beneficial, for by its aid the substances to be employed may 
 be forced into the skin, thus affecting directly the portions 
 that require treatment. The most obstinate cases of moth 
 patch and freckles have been speedily affected by this method 
 when other means have failed, while in any process 1k 1 
 suits are more rapidly attained 
 
Mi) THE SKIN. 
 
 Experiments have proved that by moistening electrodes 
 with certain substances and applying them to the unbroken 
 skin, making the current sufficiently strong, the materials 
 have been forced into circulation. For instance, concentrated 
 solutions of sulphate of quinine and iodide of potassium 
 can be detected in the urine thirty minutes after they have 
 been applied to the skin. The amount detected after four 
 or five hours is even greater, showing that the process has 
 been going on steadily. In all of this work the idea is, of 
 course, to cause the drugs to enter the circulation. 
 
 In bleaching the skin there is only a desire to cause the 
 fluid to penetrate a certain distance in order to remove 
 the discolorations. Great care must be taken to select 
 liquids that can be used with the positive pole, as otherwise 
 the work will be useless. The bleaching lotion mentioned 
 elsewhere has been found most excellent for this purpose 
 and may be used by moistening the cotton thoroughly and 
 placing it in the positive electrode. The negative electrode 
 may be used with cotton moistened with salt and water and 
 held on some indifferent portion of the skin, or as indicated 
 in Figure 14. At least fifteen minutes may be spent for 
 each treatment and the current from six cells may be em- 
 ployed to begin with, gradually increasing them to ten as 
 desired. Where the effect of a general bleaching is desired 
 the current may be used longer, say twenty minutes, chang- 
 ing the poles, instead of using the positive alone, by sub- 
 stituting the negative occasionally. Treatments of this kind 
 are better given after the water massage has been used, and 
 will be found to be most effective when they are given at 
 least three times a week. Mild discolorations may be re- 
 moved with greater ease and will demand far fewer treat- 
 ments. 
 
Figure 14. 
 Massage with Use of the Faradic Current, 
 
142 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 USE OF ELECTRICITY IN MASSAGE. 
 
 In massage of the skin, where there is a desire to stim- 
 ulate, the Faradic current is usually employed. In addition 
 to the desired effect there is a pleasant tingling sensation, 
 which to many people is really most soothing. Neuralgic 
 pains of the face and head are quickly relieved by this cur- 
 rent, while nervous headaches vanish so speedily that the 
 cure seems remarkable. 
 
 The Faradic portion of the battery is used much as the 
 galvanic section. The current is produced by immersing 
 the plates in the solution, and the fact that this portion is in 
 working order may be told by the humming, buzzing noise 
 that commences as soon as the plates are in position. The 
 current is utilized by attaching the conducting cords to the 
 posts marked P and N and increasing the strength if neces- 
 sary by extending the little 
 shield that projects from the 
 right of the coil. 
 
 In massage work the patient 
 holds one electrode in her hand, 
 while the operator fastens the 
 cord to her wrist electrode, as 
 shown in Illustration 14. The 
 current thus passes through the 
 fingers of the operator to the 
 face of the patient. The. direc- 
 tions in the rules for massage 
 may be observed here, being careful not to extend the 
 use of the current for longer than twenty minutes at any 
 time. 
 
 A way of uniting the cleansing and stimulating treat- 
 ment in one operation may easily be practiced by the use 
 of the same apparatus just as described and applying the 
 
 Wrist Electrode. 
 
Figure 15, 
 
 Use of Massage Roller, 
 
144 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 water massage at the same time. This can be easily done 
 and is considered an exceedingly beneficial treatment. The 
 current used in this method will need to be very light, as 
 otherwise the shock will be too great. 
 
 The massage roller, Figure 15*, may be used by attaching 
 
 The Massage Roller, 
 it to the conducting cord and applying as it may most be 
 needed. Of course, in all of this work the positive pole is 
 the one to be applied to the skin for the purpose of stimula- 
 tion, while the negative electrode is either held stationary 
 upon the skin or is clasped in the hand. 
 
 The vibratile is a most excellent article for use in this 
 
 The Vibratile. 
 
 work, and is easily managed, as shown by Figure 16. It is 
 connected to at least four of the galvanic cells and is ap- 
 plied by gently drawing it over the face, causing a stimulat- 
 ing effect difficult to describe. The rapid interruptions 
 cause vibrations deep enough to affect the muscles power- 
 
Figure 1<>. 
 Use of the Vibratile. 
 
146 THE SKIN. 
 
 fully. This instrument is particularly beneficial in the 
 treatment of flabby skins, the reduction of a fat neck and 
 also in the stimulation or development of the breast. 
 
 The neurotone, as illustrated in Figure 17 is also a val- 
 uable adjunct to facial work. It is generally used in the 
 treatment of flabby skins, and as shown may be utilized for 
 pressing out the deep creases in the forehead. The re- 
 markable results in restoring tone to the skin by the use of 
 this instrument has made it exceedingly popular with the 
 best operators. As indicated in the illustration, it is used 
 with the Faradic current; however, in some instances, the 
 connections ordinarily used will not produce sufficient cur- 
 
 The Neurotone. 
 
 rent to give the desired effect. In case the connections to 
 the secondary binding posts do not produce a sufficiently 
 powerful current, it may be increased by this method. One 
 cord may be attached as usual from the negative secondary 
 binding post to the neurotone, while the other bifurcated 
 cord may be attached to both the positive secondary and 
 primary binding posts, making the connection to the neuro- 
 tone as before. 
 
 The Faradic current is also employed with very pleasing 
 
Figure IT. 
 
 Use of the Neuroi 
 
II- THE SKIN. 
 
 results in the treatment of the scalp, and here it acts as a 
 most reliable tonic, promoting the growth of the hair to 
 a remarkable degree and improving the condition of the 
 scalp. In Figure 8 the use of the electric hair brush is 
 shown, and this is, perhaps, the favorite method for admin- 
 istering the current. If the bristles seem a little too sharp 
 and the patient is sensitive the tips of the fingers may be 
 used on the scalp after the wrist electrode has been con- 
 nected. In this way the current will have a milder effect. 
 
 There are many other ways of using these currents, but 
 as each operator has her own particular class of people to 
 treat, she soon becomes accustomed to the methods best 
 suited to her work and uses nothing else. In the use of 
 electricity the same rule applies and only experiment and 
 study can teach which is best suited for her purpose. With 
 the experience acquired through persistent application and 
 study any clever woman can soon achieve marked success 
 in this field. 
 
CHAPTER XX. 
 
 THE CARE OF Till II W'hS. 
 
 The woman who wishes to preserve the beauty of her 
 
 hands can easily do so if she will devote at least five min- 
 utes a day to the work of attending to them. This will, of 
 course be in addition to the weekly manicure, for in actual 
 care the attention of a professional will be secured at least 
 as often as this. It is said by close observers that hands 
 show the beginning of age much sooner than the face, and 
 that it is by this fact alone that many women otherwise 
 beautiful have been unable to deceive their acquaintances 
 in regard to the number of years that have flown. The 
 flesh becomes flabby and withered in appearance, brown 
 spots appear and the joints look as though much larger 
 than formerly, simply from the falling away of the skin 
 and the formation of the many folds. Care will remedy 
 these defects to such an extent that a really fine-appearing 
 hand may be preserved even in old age, hence the fastidious 
 woman will do well to arrange for the expenditure of the 
 necessary minutes each day if she wishes to maintain a rep 
 utation for youthful appearance. 
 
 In reading of a beautiful hand the mind naturally pic- 
 tures the ideal of the artist, with firm white flesh, long, 
 tapering fingers, delicately tinted, filbert-shaped nails and 
 soft, pink palm. A pleasing vision, indeed, but one seldom 
 seen, for the model hand is nearly as rare as the model foot, 
 and the majority of people must be contented with one that 
 will at least not be classed as "impossible/ ' even if it can 
 not be called beautiful. A great authority ha- -aid that tin 
 truly patrician hand can only be found when their have 
 
!.->.. THE SKIN. 
 
 been generations of noble ancestors. The student of palm- 
 istry can easily contradict this fact, for experience proves 
 that very frequently people of the humblest parentage pos- 
 sess hands so perfectly molded that the noblest might well 
 long to possess them. The earnest thinker and close ob- 
 server has never been found with a hand of this type, neither 
 has the successful or ambitious business woman. The idle 
 dreamers or artistic souls are usually those who claim the 
 ideal hand, and it is well that this should be so, for they de- 
 serve some compensation for being so useless from a prac- 
 tical point of view. 
 
 The time to change or improve the shape of the hands, 
 fingers or nails is that of infancy, and the careful mother 
 will see that the tiny finger nails are treated with due at- 
 tention. Infants who show a tendency to keep the fingers 
 in their mouths not only change the shape of the finger and 
 alter the beauty of the nail, but also spoil the mouth as well. 
 This tendency may be checked by applying a solution of 
 quinine to the tips of the fingers. As they grow older the 
 tiny finger should be rubbed with oil, the cuticle pressed 
 back with an orangewood stick and the nails trimmed care- 
 fully that they may be encouraged to grow long and slender. 
 Biting of the nails must positively be forbidden and if neces- 
 sary stringent measures taken to prevent the practice. 
 Children should also be taught how to care for the hands 
 and how to prevent the rough, red appearance so universally 
 seen in childhood. It can hardly be argued that a child will 
 not enjoy the playtimes as well without these bleeding, raw 
 surfaces as with them, and by a very little work the habit 
 may be formed that will be successful in preventing this 
 condition. 
 
 The greatest amount of trouble comes because not one 
 person in a hundred is taught to wash the hands properly. 
 
I'lIK SKIN. 151 
 
 Soap is a cleansing medium made of alkalies and 
 fats. Combined with water a lather is formed thai cleanses 
 the skin. Allowed to remain on the skin and become dry, 
 the alkali keeps on actively irritating the cuticle and the 
 result is shown in the reddened and coarse surface. Soaps 
 for cleansing purposes, such as the common household 
 soaps, are invariably strongly alkaline and should never he- 
 used to remove soil from anything less delicate than wood- 
 work. The mixture for the hands shouki be as nearly 
 neutral as possible, and a soap of this description will not 
 make much of a lather. Children should be taught that 
 after the hands are cleansed by the action of the soap and 
 water they should be rinsed off well in clear water and then 
 carefully dried. If they are at all inclined to become chapped 
 or irritated each time after the washing process a little 
 jelly may be rubbed in well and the hands dried as usual. 
 
 A very good mixture for this purpose is called Rose 
 Jelly. It is easily made and will be found excellent for 
 general use. 
 
 ROSE JELLY. 
 
 Mucilage of Irish moss 2 § 
 
 Glycerine 3 o 
 
 Extract witch hazel (dist.) 2;, 
 
 Cologne i;, 
 
 Borax 30 gr. 
 
 Dissolve the borax in the witch hazel, mix with half ol 
 the glycerine and cologne and add Oil of Rose sufficient to 
 perfume. Mix other part of glycerine with mucilage and 
 then stir slowly into the part first prepared. After allow- 
 ing it to stand three hours, strain and it will be ready for 
 use. 
 
 This jelly when properly made will not have an oily 
 feet and will dry in immediately. It is best applied while 
 
L52 THE SKIN. 
 
 the hands are still damp. At least once a day after the 
 hands have been thoroughly cleansed the cuticle should be 
 pressed back with an orangewood stick and the nails thor- 
 oughly rubbed with chamois skin. By folding this over the 
 first finger it may be made into a most excellent buffer for 
 polishing, using it alternately on the first finger of each 
 hand as it may be required for polishing the nails of the 
 other. 
 
 Women of leisure and wealth rarely either require or 
 need advice as to the care of their hands. It is those who 
 are so occupied that they cannot take time to consult the 
 expert or to those who are situated away from large centers 
 or those, who though possessing the inclination, have not 
 the money to spend on this work, that these lines will be 
 most welcome. The woman who does her own housework 
 may not always admit it, but the one great disadvantage 
 that fills her with dismay is not so much the labor involved 
 as the unsightly appearance her hands present. 
 
 Much of this difficulty may be avoided not only by 
 care in the use of soaps, and in cleansing the hands, but 
 also by efforts made to save them from all unnecessary 
 trials. For instance, in washing dishes, hand mops can be 
 purchased that will do away with the necessity for keeping 
 the hands in water so long at a time. Rubber gloves are 
 also a wonderful aid in this respect. When the work of 
 sweeping or other heavy labor is to be done the soft palms 
 should be protected by an old pair of gloves, very loose 
 and soft enough to prevent callous lines from appearing 
 where the seams are joined. In every part of domestic ar- 
 rangements much may be done by expending a little 
 thought to make the demand on the hands very much less. 
 
 When the hands are very red and appear swollen, phys- 
 ical culture will do much toward overcoming this proof of 
 
INK SKIN 
 
 poor circulation. Tight lacing is now so little practiced thai 
 few women arc guilty of undue compression, otherwise il 
 might be mentioned as a frequent cause of the trouble men 
 tioned. Another difficult}- equall) embarrassing and one 
 more difficult to cure is that of undue perspiration, in which 
 the palms are constantly moist, ruining any gloves the first 
 time they are worn, and making- the act of shaking hands a 
 positive torture. This last trouble may frequently be en 
 tirely cured by dusting this powder over the palms each 
 time after washing them. 
 
 DUSTING POWDER. 
 
 Boracic acid i;, 
 
 Alum (powdered) 2 \ 
 
 Salycilic acid I % 
 
 Talcum 25 
 
 Mix together and sift through several layers of bolting 
 cloth until ready for use, then dust on as required. 
 
 Cosmetic mittens worn at night do much to soften the 
 hands and make them presentable, but if the work during 
 the day is extremely trying, it is often unwise to attempt 
 wearing them, as the hands are made so much more tender 
 that they become rough more readily upon immersion in 
 soap and water. For those who have no particular de- 
 mands upon them for undue exertion the use of the mit- 
 tens each night will certainly do wonders. They are pre- 
 pared in a number of ways, and there are numerous recipes 
 for the paste-like mixtures, but none of them are better than 
 the one that follows : 
 
 WHITENING PASTE. 
 
 Rub into one pound of honey enough of the powder of 
 almonds to make a stiff paste, and then add graduall) the 
 whites of eggs until six have been used. Stir in twelve 
 
154 THE SKIN. 
 
 ounces of almond oil, six ounces of solution of alum (sat- 
 urated) and four of borax. Mix well, and if too thin add 
 more almond meal. This is to be used by spreading upon 
 the hands at night and then drawing on large mittens or 
 loose gloves to protect the clothing. Another method is to 
 spread the paste on mittens before applying, but the effect 
 is more uniform if spread directly upon the hands. 
 
 In the morning wash off with warm water, and before 
 the hands are entirely dry rub in the rose jelly. 
 
 At no time will hands appear to worse advantage than 
 just when they should look the best. This is invariably the 
 case on the occasion of some dinner of state occasion where 
 these important members must be decidedly in evidence. 
 More than one woman has shed bitter tears as the last mo- 
 ment approached and the red or discolored appearance was 
 as obtrusive as ever. A remedy that may be applied to 
 very good advantage will doubtless be appreciated by those 
 so bothered. This cream is too startlingly white to be used 
 on the face, but may be rubbed in the hand whenever the 
 occasion demands, with the happiest of results. It is best 
 applied immediately after cleansing the hands well with 
 soap and water, and is easily prepared. A clever woman 
 who used this preparation with the happiest of results de- 
 clared that to those who were obliged to resort to anything 
 of this kind the only appropriate term for this preparation 
 was the Slave's Delight. It is made by sifting the subni- 
 trate of bismuth into the blended oils and then stirring until 
 smooth. 
 
 DISGUISE FOR RED HANDS. 
 
 Almond oil 45 
 
 Lanolin 1 § 
 
 Spermaceti 1 § 
 
 White wax I § 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 Subnitrate of bismuth i .-, 
 
 Oil bitter almonds [o drops 
 
 In addition to home care- every woman who can afford if 
 employs the professional manicure at leas! once a week 
 and oftener if necessary. The treatments when given by 
 
 one who thoroughly understands the art is so pleasing that 
 the expense of the work is but a small consideration. There 
 has been a tendency of late years to make the fee for this 
 work less. When one stops to consider that a good mani- 
 cure cannot be given in less than one hour, to say nothing 
 of the amount of material that must be used during the 
 process, the complaints against the first-class professionals 
 who persist in charging living rates will be heard with less 
 patience. A thoroughly good treatment will consume the 
 greater part of an hour, besides involving the use of much 
 material, and, if the work is to be well done, the remunera- 
 tion must be in proportion. 
 
 The tools necessary for this work vary, as used by the 
 different schools of manicuring, but should always consist 
 of at least those in the following list. 
 
 i package of orange wood sticks. 
 
 2 buffers. 
 
 2 scissors. 
 
 2 files. 
 
 i package emery board. 
 
 I box polishing powder. 
 
 i box ointment. 
 
 i box fine pumice stone. 
 
 i bottle cleansing liquid. 
 
 i cuticle knife. 
 
 The best professionals generally commence the treat- 
 ment by trimming the nails and shaping them on one hand, 
 while the other is placed in the warm soapy water. After 
 
156 THE SKIN. 
 
 a few moments the hand that has been soaked is taken in 
 charge and the nails are brushed vigorously with the small 
 nail brush and soap. The cuticle knife is then used for 
 pushing back the flesh that has encroached upon the sur- 
 face of the nails, and the orange wood stick is employed to 
 push back the skin at the base of the nail. If the under part 
 of the nails seem much discolored, a mixture of pumice 
 stone and cleansing liquid, such as ongaline, is placed all 
 about the selvage skin, just inside the nail, and allowed to 
 remain for a time. During this process the second hand 
 should have been soaking and should be ready for the 
 work just described. 
 
 The first hand is once more ready for treatment and 
 the work of removing the pumice stone is now commenced 
 by the use of the orange wood stick. If there is still dis- 
 coloration in any nail the mixture must be replaced again. 
 A bit of the polishing powder is then sprinkled upon the 
 buffer and the work of imparting the gloss is commenced. 
 In this, care must be taken to avoid heating the nail and 
 the strokes should be given in a leisurely manner. After 
 the polishing with powder has been finished, a little of the 
 white or rose colored ointment is rubbed on the nail, more 
 powder is placed upon the buffer and the work again re- 
 sumed. When the nails seem uniformly polished the hand 
 is again placed in water and scrubbed well with the little 
 brush. Examination now reveals the presence of rough- 
 ness under the nails and perhaps several places where the 
 cuticle needs attention. The emery boards are used for 
 removing roughness under the nails and hang-nails that 
 have not succumbed to the trimming given by the scissors 
 are again retouched and then the polishing or kid buffer 
 employed to give the final touch. The results should be 
 nails finely polished, delicately pink in appearance and well 
 
1111- SKIN. I,. 
 
 shaped, with no bleeding surfaces to make one feel thai 
 the tools had been more vigorously than wisely used. 
 The use of the scissors excepting in removing hang 
 
 nails or in clipping nails that are too long to file is but 
 a small item. The best operators all employ the orange 
 wood sticks whenever it is possible to do so, and the) have 
 them of all shapes and kinds. The cuticle knife is used 
 most cautiously so that the enamel of the nail ma\ nol be 
 injured while any acid that must be applied to remove 
 stains is managed most warily, lest other trouble comes 
 of it. The files are used as the case demands, the dainty 
 velvet file doing the fine work after the heavier one has 
 removed all portions that are not needed. The use of the 
 cuticle knife beneath the nail should be avoided if possible, 
 on account of the danger of injuring the under surface and 
 making it rough. 
 
 The woman in business will hardly bother about prepar- 
 ing any of the articles needed in her work, as she can 
 economize both time and money by purchasing those already 
 prepared. Others who may wish to do a little of this pol- 
 ishing and shaping at home may use this recipe for a pol- 
 ishing powder : 
 
 Yellow oxide of tin (powdered) .... 2 % 
 
 Venetian talcum I ."> 
 
 Petrolatum 1 3 
 
 Rub the petrolatum in with the talcum and then rub in 
 the oxide of tin and sift through a fine bolting cloth. 
 
 The liquid for removing stains and for whitening the 
 nails may be made by mixing these ingredients : 
 
 Dioxide of hydrogen 3 3 
 
 Lemon juice i ."> 
 
 Ammonia 1 3 
 
L68 THE SKIN. 
 
 The tinted cream may be made by adding a few grains 
 of carmine to the recipe as a disguise for red hands, or if 
 the rosy tint is not desired, the white cream itself may be 
 employed. These simple substitutes are most efficacious in 
 the hands of intelligent workers and may be recommended 
 as at least being harmless. 
 
CHAPTER XXL 
 
 HOW TO IMPROVE THE ARMS, SHOULDERS, NECK AND B1 ST. 
 
 There is little excuse in this progressive age for the 
 
 possession of scrawny necks, round shoulders, poorly de- 
 veloped busts and skinny arms. True, physical culture alone 
 may not be able to more than fill out the hollows, but unite 
 this system with massage and the use of the various oint- 
 ments for refining the coarse skin, and the change will 
 indeed be most marvelous. 
 
 A beautiful arm should be softly rounded, smooth and 
 white, and should taper gradually to the hand. Many of 
 the skinniest and roughest arms have been made over with 
 marvelous success by the following method : 
 
 First, of course, comes exercise in the open air, playing 
 games such as golf, tennis or croquet, and the use of the 
 system particularly directed to the work of remedying any 
 deficiencies that seem the most strongly marked. The cos- 
 metic treatment will, of course, depend upon the condition 
 of the skin, and if it is rough and covered with flesh that 
 looks pimply, the work can be hastened greatly by bathing 
 each night with warm water and paste soap, using wash- 
 cloth of coarse variety to cause more friction. The arms 
 may then be rubbed well with a good tissue food or Creme 
 Celeste, using deep massage for at least fifteen minute-. 
 In the morning cold water baths may he taken, and the 
 massage treatment continued for at least three week-. At 
 the end of that time the roughness should have subsided 
 sufficiently to allow a change, and this lotion may he applied 
 each night: 
 
160 THE SKIN. 
 
 Rose water 65 
 
 Tincture benzoin 10 
 
 Oxide zinc . . . . I 3 
 
 Shake well and apply with a sponge and allow it to dry 
 in thoroughly before rubbing; then commence the massage 
 without ointment for a few minutes each night. By the 
 end of five or six weeks there should be a marked improve- 
 ment. 
 
 When, in addition to being skinny the arms are also 
 covered with wiry black hair, the treatment is more diffi- 
 cult, for it is impossible to disguise the condition sufficiently 
 to allow the use of short sleeves or evening dress. Hence 
 the choice must be made between these two methods : The 
 first consists of using a depilatory from time to time and 
 thus removing the hair completely for a temporary period ; 
 the second is by using enough peroxide of hydrogen to 
 thoroughly bleach the hair so that it will hardly be notice- 
 able. If the first process is chosen the depilatory given 
 here may be tried, and though said to be extremely effective 
 in some cases, it is certainly a trifle severe in others and 
 can never be applied with any degree of certainty as far as 
 the after-effect on the skin is concerned. 
 
 DEPILATORY. 
 
 Orpiment 15 
 
 Quicklime 105 
 
 Starch 143 
 
 The ingredients must be ground into a fine powder and 
 kept in a tightly corked bottle. When used, a small por- 
 tion of the powder should be mixed with water into a paste 
 and spread over the hairy portions. As soon as the paste 
 dries, wash it off, and the hair will come with it. If the 
 skin is extremely sensitive and commences to smart, the 
 
mi SKI 
 
 ]Ki :!\ "'" " e ! d '" bC remoVed Mediately or the cuticl, 
 ^ Ilb€ 7 ure d. [n any event, as soon as it has been washed 
 oft. a mild cream should be applied. 
 
 I 1 " Ae peroxide treatmenl is used, the am. mus f I,, 
 "* shed ; ,rs[ w,th ^P -"1 water, then with a solution of 
 soda and water, to take away all traces of oil that may 1,, 
 upon the skin. Then a mixture of peroxide and ammonia 
 may be applied by means of some cotton or a sof( cloth 
 This may be continued until the hairs are sufficiently 
 beached, and if the first treatment is not sufficient to accom- 
 plish the purpose, a second may be taken. The proportion 
 of the two liquids should be one of ammonia to six of 
 peroxide, and it is said that a continued use will make tin 
 hair so brittle that they will fall out. and in time cease to 
 reappear. At any rate the bleaching process make, than 
 much less conspicuous. 
 
 Deep massage is much used for toning the muscl. 
 the neck and shoulders, and applications of various oint- 
 ments and lotions are often necessary in order to make the 
 skin look well. The best formed neck can never appear 
 to advantage if its beauty is marred by the appearance of a 
 deep mark of dingy hue encircling it, and this is an occur- 
 rence that is only too common. The cause is, of cours 
 found in the stiff neckwear, either of linen or any other 
 material that encircles the throat closely. 
 
 The cure is first of all in abolishing anything, but sofl 
 ribbons or other substitutes that will look as well. Next, in 
 using a whitening cream each night for massaging the .kin 
 and last of all in applying a bleaching lotion until tin- de- 
 colorations have vanished. The use of cloths saturated in 
 peroxide of hydrogen after the water mass; 
 cellent as an aid in hastening the pn.ee- of whitening the 
 skin. 
 
162 THE SKIN. 
 
 The sagging of the flesh directly under the chin may, 
 of course, be prevented by the use of proper massage, as 
 illustrated in Figure 6, while the mallets may also be em- 
 ployed to advantage for the same purpose, and exponents 
 of vocal culture declare that the proper use of the muscles 
 in singing will be of great use for this purpose. The proc- 
 ess is a trifle expensive, however, for those of ordinary 
 means, so massage and exercise will generally be called 
 the best aids. 
 
 The hollow spaces found about the neck and shoulders 
 almost inevitably yield to exercise unless the individual is 
 extremely emaciated. Applications of a nourishing skin 
 food and the use of the deep plucking massage are ex- 
 tremely beneficial, while above and beyond all may be men- 
 tioned the use of the breathing exercises mentioned in an- 
 other chapter. The shoulders of perfect beauty are usually 
 an inheritance, for they should form a continuous curve 
 from the neck to the arm, with no sharply defined departure 
 to make the change. Physiological development will do 
 much toward improving the carriage and toward broadening 
 the shoulders, but of course cannot entirely change the 
 original form. 
 
 If the skin should be rough and covered with small red 
 pimples, a state frequently common during the summer 
 months, the following treatment will be found most bene- 
 ficial. First of all, a course of sulphur baths, followed by 
 the application of this paste each night : 
 
 Honey I g 
 
 Alum sol 2 § 
 
 Whites of eggs 2 
 
 Carbolic acid I 3 
 
 Almond oil 2 § 
 
 Almond meal sufficient to make a paste. 
 
III!'. SKIN. 
 
 In the morning this paste ma) be removed bj the us< 
 
 of warm water and a mild soap, and this lotion applied: 
 
 Rose water 6 J 
 
 Lemon juice i 9j 
 
 Borax i .I 
 
 Alcohol i g 
 
 Glycerine i ."> 
 
 One week of this treatment should get the skin in vu \ 
 good condition, though if it is very rough it will also be 
 necessary to use massage as well before the paste is applied. 
 If necessary to appear in public in evening dress before the 
 skin has become smooth enough to look as ii should, the 
 whitening creme may be applied and rubbed, in energetic- 
 ally and then powder dusted on. Many famous beauties 
 invariably use a creme of this description as a preparation 
 for an evening toilet. 
 
 The development of the bust is a matter that create- 
 much interest, for the woman who is thin declares, to be 
 happy, she must be larger, while the over-developed one 
 longs hopelessly for a decrease. The perfectly developed 
 woman is, of course, neither one nor the other, but just right. 
 and there should be approximately a difference of about ten 
 inches between the size of the waist and the bust, and prac- 
 tically the same difference between the hips and the waist. 
 
 Proper exercise, bathing and light massage are the best 
 remedies for increasing the measurements, and if due care 
 is taken, there will be few r poorly developed women aside 
 from those suffering from physical weakness. The use oi 
 the many glass arrangements and metallic attachments ad- 
 vertised for this purpose cannot be too strongly condemned. 
 In the hands of specialists they may do some good, but as a 
 rule they are harmful beyond belief, and may produce per- 
 manent injury when applied by the novice. Massage oi 
 
164 THE SKIN. 
 
 the breasts should be most carefully done, after washing 
 them with warm water and applying a good skin food. The 
 movement should be performed with the flat portion of the 
 hand, rubbing in a circular fashion around and around, 
 and finishing with a quick dash of cold water. Deep breath- 
 ing exercises will also be of great benefit, and those who 
 have been able to take swimming lessons claim they can see 
 a wonderful difference as a result. Electricity may also be 
 employed to advantage by using the Faradic current for 
 fifteen minutes daily. 
 
 The reduction of the breasts desired by overly stout 
 women should never be attempted by the amateur, for there 
 is too much danger of causing some injury which may later 
 develop into a malignant growth, as this portion of the body 
 is peculiarly susceptible to trouble of this kind. The use 
 of bandages wet in solutions containing lead have been 
 much in vogue and cannot be too vigorously forbidden, as 
 the absorption of this poisonous material into the system is 
 even more dangerous when applied upon this part of the 
 body than when used on the scalp, as in hair tonic, etc. If 
 something must be done, the afflicted one may try bathing 
 the parts with a solution of tannin and alcohol — ten per cent 
 of tannin being the quantity used — and following with a 
 light massage and cold water. This method may in time 
 take away the superfluous flesh and will at any rate be 
 harmless. 
 
CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 THE MOUTH AND TEETH. 
 
 The woman who is fortunate enough to i a beau- 
 
 tiful mouth, of medium size, with an upper lip bowed, and 
 moderately thin underlip, both fresh in coloring, ran n< 
 be altogether unattractive. If in addition to this important 
 feature she owns a set of sound, white teeth, sin- is indeed 
 to be congratulated, for, with two such aids, she may hope- 
 to make much of herself. Complexions may be beautified 
 and hair may be transformed, but a mouth is impossible to 
 remake, unless surgery can be employed, and even then the 
 small scars resulting will not assist in making matters any 
 better. 
 
 So few people can be said to possess the perfect mouth, 
 it may be well to consider the best means of treating the 
 imperfections commonly seen, and in order to do this it will 
 be necessary to understand the requisites necessary for the 
 normal condition of the ordinary mouth. 
 
 The lips are two horizontal, flexible folds, surrounding 
 the opening of the mouth, and on this margin the skin 
 passes into the mucous membrane. The red portion of the 
 lips, though really belonging to this mucous membrane, also 
 partake of the nature of the skin. The coloring should be 
 fresh, with a decided, though dry, gloss. The beauty of the 
 lips depends not only upon the coloring and outline of the 
 margin, but also on the symmetrical distribution of the 
 tissue and the peculiar bright gloss of the red portion. 
 
 The cosmetic defects most frequently found are thoa 
 color, shape and condition of the epidermis. The lips may 
 be too thick, or too thin, too much bowed, or too long and 
 
L66 THE SKIN. 
 
 straight. Aside from the application of coloring, cleverly 
 simulating the desired curves, little can be done to remedy 
 defects in form, though it has been said that to some ex- 
 tent the conditions may be improved. For instance, bathing 
 the lips with tannin will somewhat reduce the size, while 
 thin, drawn-in lips are declared to be improved by the 
 application of irritants. The use of coloring as mentioned 
 will not be possible in daylight, but can be used for stage 
 purposes alone, and in this way may entirely change the 
 expression of the face. 
 
 Colorless lips, when caused by ill health, are usually 
 remedied only by general improvement, and in case of 
 wasting disease, of great severity, nothing but the paint- 
 pot can remedy the condition. 
 
 The cosmetic error most commonly seen is that of chap- 
 ping of the lips. In some cases the epithelium seems to 
 peel off without cause, at any time of the year. In others, 
 this trouble is caused by the use of sharp spices, cheap cos- 
 metics, and often by poisoning from colored veils. In all 
 severe cases the lips are pale and covered with scales, or red 
 and surmounted by brownish crusts. Deep incisions, either 
 in the center or at the corners of the mouth bleed readily 
 on pressure. This trouble, if neglected, may become 
 chronic, leaving the mouth in such a distorted condition that 
 it is almost as disagreeable to behold as it is painful to 
 possess. Taken in time, it will often yield to treatment, by 
 applying the proper ointments and avoiding the use of irri- 
 tants. Many people, in an endeavor to remedy matters, have 
 but increased the difficulty by using pure glycerine, instead 
 of an oil, and in this way simply intensified the irritation. 
 
 If the applications of soothing salves are not efficacious, 
 and the incisions persist in becoming deeper, it may be 
 necessary to cauterize the portions before destroying them 
 
THE SKIN li , 
 
 entirely. This rigorous process ma) be followed bj bland 
 substances with good results. For ordinar) purposes this 
 
 salve will be found efficacious: 
 
 Lanolin i .~> 
 
 Almond oil 2 ~> 
 
 Spermaceti 2 3 
 
 White wax i.l 
 
 Carbolic acid y 2 Z 
 
 Melt the oils together, and add the acid when the mix- 
 ture has cooled. Apply whenever necessary. In addition 
 to the use of the salves, certain precautions should be ob- 
 served. For instance, the lips must not be moistened while 
 out in the air. The practice of biting them musl nol be 
 allowed, and, most important, no veil should be worn that 
 will draw across or touch the lips in any way. By observing 
 these rules much trouble may be easily avoided. 
 
 The treatment of the gums must also occupy some atten- 
 tion, as no mouth can be considered perfect if the gums 
 appear pallid and unhealthy. In reality, they are simply 
 the mucous membrane surrounding the teeth. When in 
 perfect health they are firm, of regular contour, with pyra- 
 mids not too prominent, and of a healthy red. The 
 metic defects of the gums do not depend so much on general 
 diseases and are more easily treated as connected with the 
 teeth. The proper attention to one is generally sufficient 
 to insure a good condition in the other. When, in use of the 
 toothbrush, the gums bleed easily, there is, of course, an 
 indication of loosening and inflammation that will necessi 
 tale the use of a flat toothbrush, instead of a narrow one, 
 and the brushing of the gums themselves, as well as the 
 teeth. A mouth wash is of benefit in these cases and may 
 be applied either with a brush or by means of a cotton 
 swab. It may be made of these ingredients: 
 
L68 THE SKIN. 
 
 Listerine I 5 
 
 Alum sol Y /z o 
 
 Myrrh 
 
 2 
 
 Water 3 o 
 
 Cases of receding gums are more difficult to treat, as the 
 trouble is not only constitutional but local. The wash that 
 may be used to good advantage is best made by mixing 
 together — 
 
 Lime water 25 
 
 Myrrh 1 5 
 
 Bals. Peru 1 3 
 
 Milk magnesia 6 § 
 
 This .wash may be used many times during the day, and 
 in addition the service of the dentist should be employed. 
 
 Perfect teeth are said to be nearly as rare as perfect 
 gems. This statement may well bring a smile of pleasure 
 to the lips of the woman who possesses the requisite num- 
 ber in absolutely good condition. The cosmetic errors of 
 the teeth are now so well cared for by specialists who have 
 made the simulation of good ones a study, that nearly every 
 woman may purchase what Nature has denied her, if she 
 wishes to do so. Unsightly cavities are cleansed and built 
 up with porcelain so nearly matching the teeth that it is 
 impossible to tell where it begins, or ends. Or, if the teeth 
 are really hopeless, the greater part will be cut away and a 
 new portion made that will fit on the old roots and extend 
 into the gums, in such a manner that detection is practically 
 impossible. 
 
 The incrustations that appear in the form of a yellowish 
 deposit should be removed as soon as they appear, as other- 
 wise the enamel will be injured, and the teeth thus be made 
 to decay. There are many forms of these deposits, and of 
 course the soft ones may be kept away by the use of a 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 
 toothbrush and a good dentifrice, but the hard variety will 
 need the attention of the dentist. Ii so situated that his 
 services cannot be commanded, much may be done by ver) 
 
 careful work with the finest of pumice stone mixed with 
 powdered charcoal and applied by means f a small stick and 
 a hit of cotton. This work must he very cautiously done. 
 
 Absolutely clean teeth will not decay, hut as it is impos- 
 sible to reach all the tiny cavities and thoroughly cleanse 
 them, constant work is necessary in order to prevent the 
 tiny particles of food from accumulating in the crevices. 
 The use of a poor dentifrice is thus responsible for much 
 trouble, and care must be taken to secure one that is fully 
 adequate to the task of cleansing the crevices as well as the 
 surface. A dentifrice that may be easily prepared and will 
 be as effective as any, may be made of these ingredients 
 
 Orris root powder 45 
 
 Precipitated chalk 8 J 
 
 White castile soap 45 
 
 Oil sassafras 40 drops 
 
 Oil bay 80 drops 
 
 Honey enough to form paste. 
 
 Or, if a liquid dentifrice is preferred, there may he a 
 demand for this recipe, as it cleanses the teeth nicely and 
 will not injure the enamel: 
 
 Quillaja, coarse powder iy 2 § 
 
 Cochineal powder 15 gr 
 
 Glycerine 3 § 
 
 Oil of wintergreen 25 drops 
 
 Alcohol 1 < ) .-, 
 
 Peppermint water to make 32 | 
 
 For many purposes a wash such as described is most 
 excellent, as the alcohol penetrates into crevices and assists 
 greatly in preventing any process of decay. It ha- been 
 noticed that brandy drinkers usuall) p< fine teeth, as 
 
 the alcohol acts as a cleansing and disinfecting agent. 
 
170 THE SKIN. 
 
 When properly brushed, few teeth will require much 
 attention from the dentist, unless there is some process of 
 crumbling going on, that is due to insufficient bone-making 
 material in the body. It is quite surprising to note in this 
 connection that even when people are desirous of saving 
 their teeth and preventing decay, few of them actually know 
 how to use a toothbrush. 
 
 A hard brush is usually indicated in cases wdiere the gums 
 are normal. Even when the gums bleed, and are tender, 
 this tendency may be overcome by the use of a brush of this 
 description. Before using a new brush it should be well 
 washed with soap and water and then allowed to stand in a 
 solution of boracic acid for at least one hour. Then the 
 powder should be applied on the brush, and the teeth 
 cleansed by drawing it vertically from above downward, 
 and from below, upward. The next process consists in 
 brushing them horizontally and finally the upper and under 
 surfaces should be cleansed. If the teeth are extremely 
 brittle, the process may be finished by rinsing the mouth out 
 with lime water. In any event it is well to use a mouth 
 wash from time to time, employing either listerine or some 
 thing of that nature for the purpose. 
 
 Discolorations may be removed by scrubbing the surface 
 of the teeth with bits of cotton, soaked in pyrozone and 
 water, say a twenty-five per cent solution and then rinsing 
 the mouth out with clear water. A yellow appearance is 
 common to some teeth, while in others it is induced by the 
 use of dentifrices containing a great deal of soap. It is 
 never wise to employ the bleaching fluid too frequently, as 
 in time it might injure the enamel. 
 
 The disagreeable odor from the mouth, that is not only 
 embarrassing but disgusting as well, may arise from the 
 teeth or from numerous other causes. When from the 
 
THE SKIN. i.i 
 
 teeth, the filling of the cavities and constant u 
 
 dentifrice will be sufficient to banish it. It", from th< 
 
 or a catarrhal condition, the use of pyrozom argle 
 
 will be met with great success, [f the trouble arises from 
 
 a disordered stomach, of course, the cure will consist in 
 remedying the condition at fault. A mild solution of 
 boracic acid, made by adding enough of this substance to 
 water to make a ten per cent solution, will make a ver\ . 
 liquid for use in this manner. It should he used, not once, 
 but many times a day, and if necessary may he followed by 
 these pastilles for perfuming the breath. Of course, these 
 are only temporary remedies, to be used while the real cause 
 is undergoing some process of treatment. No woman of 
 any refinement can ever feel resigned to such a condition 
 if there is any aid for it. The pastilles may he made- after 
 this recipe : 
 
 Chlorate of lime 7 gr 
 
 Vanilla sugar 3 3 
 
 Gum arabic 5 3 
 
 Mix with warm water to a stiff paste, roll and cut into 
 lozenges. These pastilles will neutralize the acidity n\ the 
 stomach, and will arrest decay of the teeth, in this way 
 assisting to make the breath endurable, until further meas- 
 ures can be taken. 
 
 Finally, the following remedy for toothache will he <>i 
 benefit to those who are subject to it, and it should he kept 
 on hand, as it requires some time to prepare. It is best used 
 by applying it to a bit of cotton, and then inserting the 
 cotton in or near the aching tooth. 
 
 Camphor - ."> 
 
 Oil cajuput \ ~) 
 
 Chloroform 5 3 
 
 Oil of clove 2 3 
 
172 THE SKIN. 
 
 Mix and dissolve by agitation, and keep tightly corked, 
 until needed. Heat may also be employed to advantage, by 
 applying the hot water bottle to the side of the face most 
 affected. The use of the remedy given, in connection with 
 heat is rarely unsuccessful. 
 
CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 THE CARE OF l ll I 
 
 To be really comfortable and happy, every woman should 
 know just bow to keep her feet in good condition, If sin 
 does not, nothing is more certain than the fact thai she 
 
 will spend a certain number of days each war in an 
 tremely remorseful frame of mind, unable to walk with any 
 degree of ease on account of aching and tender pedal 
 extremities. 
 
 The most frequent cause of trouble with the feel is -im- 
 ply neglect. Of course, all civilized people do take cai 
 the body and incidentally the feet by bathing at frequent 
 intervals, but not one person in ten will take the trouble 
 to care for them intelligently and thus prevent trouble, 
 instead of going to much labor and expense curing it. When 
 one considers the number of absolutely unhygienic shoes 
 placed upon the market, made of materials that are bound to 
 cause more or less difficulty, with heels so absurdly high 
 that not only the feet but also various organs of the body 
 must suffer when they are used, there is really not much 
 occasion for sympathy with people who suffer because they 
 willfully place themselves in a position to bring on these af- 
 flictions. 
 
 One of the first requisites for good feet is found in the 
 wearing of good shoes, and by this is meant well-fitting 
 shoes that will support the instep and heel without pressing 
 the toes unduly. The sole should be moderately thick and 
 the heel low, while the leather should not be ^i either patent 
 kid or any other highly glazed variety, for anything of this 
 kind prevents ventilation and induces undue perspiration, 
 making the feet tender and painful. 
 
\:\ THE SKIN. 
 
 The hosiery, too, should be well considered, and if pos- 
 sible, all colored hose should be procured with white feet. 
 The skins of some people are so sensitive that the wearing 
 of even the most expensive colored hosiery invariably results 
 in the appearance of eruptions like water blisters 
 and terminating in a condition resembling eczema. Besides 
 procuring the hose of this description care should be taken 
 to change the stockings at least every other day, and if it 
 can be arranged every day. Fine cotton will be found the 
 best hose for all occasions, as either lisle or silk are apt 
 to irritate the skin in time, while in addition to the irrita- 
 tion the silken hose wear out so rapidly that few people care 
 to incur the expense. 
 
 The care of the feet consists in bathing them at least 
 once a day, preferably at night in lukewarm water and soap, 
 using the wash cloth carefully to cleanse the space between 
 the toes, and finishing the process by powdering the sur- 
 face well with a mixture of boracic acid and talcum. 
 
 If the flesh feels at all painful and the feet are swollen, 
 immediate steps should be taken to cure this condition and, 
 after bathing them, the following tonic should be applied : 
 
 Alcohol 6 § 
 
 Tannic acid I § 
 
 Alum y 2 5 
 
 Witch Hazel 2 § 
 
 If the swelling is extremely marked it will be well to 
 apply bandages soaked in the tonic and allow them to 
 remain over night. Before dressing in the morning the feet 
 may be sponged off with cold water, and both the stockings 
 and shoes should be dusted with the boracic acid and talcum 
 mixture. 
 
 If the joints become painful and the feet ache, the. tonic 
 may be applied as usual and the feet massaged. Of course, 
 
i in-: SKIN 
 
 this is best done by a professional, but even an amateui 
 
 do wonders in the way of relieving this condition by sup 
 porting- the foot with one hand while the other rubs from 
 the instep down to each toe and in a gently circular motion 
 the affected joints. 
 
 The following mixture may then be applied to them 
 and the remainder of the surface dusted over with powder. 
 
 FOR PAINFUL JOINTS. 
 
 Guaiacol [ g 
 
 Collodion 1 \ 
 
 Shake well and keep in a tightly corked bottle. 
 
 The cream for massaging may be either the Creme 
 Celeste or any other good cream, as it is simply to aid the 
 fingers in manipulating the flesh. 
 
 Corns may be removed and kept in most excellent sub- 
 jection by adopting the following plan. Before attempting 
 to touch them the feet should be well soaked in very warm 
 water. After removing them the callous portions should 
 be peeled off carefully, taking care not to use a sharp knife 
 that will cut the skin in any way. As soon as all of tin- 
 portion that will come away easily has been used, an appli- 
 cation of this remedy may be made. 
 
 CORN CURE. 
 
 Collodion 6 ^ 
 
 Guaiacol i 3 
 
 Canna. Indica * j ~> 
 
 Sal. acid i 3 
 
 Acetic acid ' :> 
 
 Add the liquid ingredient and shake well and then add 
 the salicylic acid and .shake well until dissolved. Keep 
 tightly corked and apply with a bit of cotton wrapped 
 around a slender piece of wood. If the mixture becomes 
 dry it may be made liquid again by adding ether to it. This 
 
 i 
 
176 THE SKIN. 
 
 remedy is most excellent for removing the pain speedily and 
 will, when properly used, be wonderfully efficacious as a 
 cure. Each night for four nights the process should be 
 continued as described, and each peeling off of the callous 
 portions should be performed with the knife that is not too 
 sharp. 
 
 At the end of that time the surface should be smooth 
 and free from any evidence of a corn. If it is not the process 
 may be continued until the corn has disappeared. An occa- 
 sional application from time to time will be all that is 
 necessary. 
 
 Before using the knife it should be sterilized as directed 
 in the chapter on this subject, and in case the flesh is injured 
 or cut a solution of boracic acid should be used immediately 
 pouring it directly on the wound and applying a small 
 bandage. In the treatment of soft corns, the same rule 
 may be adopted, being careful, however, not to attempt to 
 do anything excepting wash out and cleanse them if they 
 are festered. For this purpose peroxide of hydrogen will 
 be excellent, followed by rinsing with boracic acid solution, 
 and the placing of a dry bit of cotton between the toes to 
 prevent the accumulation of moisture. 
 
 Ingrown nails are subjects for skilled specialists, and too 
 much stress cannot be placed upon the danger of a cut to 
 flesh in this inflamed condition. An old remedy and one that 
 has been much cited may be tried by those who are obliged 
 to depend upon home treatment. It consists in scraping 
 the center of the nail as thin as possible by means of a bit 
 of broken glass, while the corners of the nails are, of course, 
 raised by means of small cotton pledgets. 
 
 If at any time there has been a cut of any kind or if the 
 foot has been injured and becomes swollen and angry in 
 appearance the wet bandage of a saturated solution of bo- 
 
IIIK SKIN. [71 
 
 racic acid should be used until a physician can I ilted 
 
 It is never wise to neglect such injuries, as man) of th< 
 fatal cases of blood poisoning have come from cuts made 
 while attempting to remove corns. It is for this thai 
 
 no cutting should be done, and instead the use of the peeling 
 process insisted upon wherever it is possible so to do, the 
 use of a strong acid for eating away corns should be for 
 bidden, as much of the surrounding flesh is involved, and 
 the danger is too great to pay for the small chance of relief. 
 
 The care and cure of corns is not difficult if hut suffi 
 cient patience is practiced, but there can be no neglect 
 if there is the trouble will soon be as disagreeable as 
 and the pain even more intense as time goes on. 
 
 Feet that perspire too freely can usually be managed by 
 bathing each night in warm water, to which a few drops 
 of formalin have been added, and in the morning dusting 
 the shoes with the powder made as follows : 
 
 Salicylic acid i § 
 
 Alum y 2 1 
 
 Boracic acid Y* % 
 
 Starch 2 § 
 
 If this is not effective enough more salicylic acid may 
 replace a portion of the starch. Ordinarily, however, it will 
 be found all that is required. In the use of any dusting pow- 
 der absolute caution is necessary in removing the powder 
 between the toes, otherwise the irritation caused b) von 
 stant rubbing will cause an inflammation and possibly the 
 portion will fester. The bathing each evening, when prop 
 erly done will prevent any such complication. 
 
 Chilblains may be effectively treated by painting them 
 with pure guaiacol, or the mixture of guaiacol and collodion 
 recommended for inflamed joints. To produce the 
 fects this preparation should be applied not once, but 
 eral times a day and again at night. 
 
55 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 CARE OF THE HAIR. 
 
 The proper treatment of the hair must also include a 
 knowledge of the best means of securing a healthful condi- 
 tion of the scalp, for hair may be compared to a plant whose 
 growth depends largely upon the quality of the soil, the 
 amount of air, sunlight and careful attention given it. 
 Ordinarily the care of the hair is restricted to very infre- 
 quent shampoos taken more to insure comfort from the 
 peculiar itching condition present when the scalp is neg- 
 lected, than because of interest in the best manner of keep- 
 ing the scalp and hair in good condition. People with fine 
 hair almost invariably abuse it, and only begin to realize 
 the necessity for treatment when it commences falling out 
 or splitting at the ends or turning a peculiar shade from the 
 application of strong tonics or poor shampoos. 
 
 The hair is a thread-like structure formed of tissue that 
 is really a modification of the cuticle. It is divided into the 
 point, the shaft and the root. The root of the hair swells 
 out into a bulbous enlargement fitting into a small recess 
 in the true skin called the follicle. Near the mouth of the 
 follicle will be found the opening ducts of one or more oil 
 glands, while at the bottom are found the papillae similar 
 to those on the skin and supplied with nervous fibrils. The 
 shaft or stem of the hair is covered with fine scales which 
 may even be felt by drawing the fingers over it from tip 
 to base. The coloring matter is generally supposed to be 
 situated in the medullary strand or pith found in the center 
 of the hairs, while the weight and number of hairs to the 
 square inch depends upon the color, thickness and length. 
 
THE SKIN. i , i 
 
 Upon the surface of a quarter of an inch Withof found of 
 
 the black hair 147, brown [62 and blonde [82, thus showing 
 that the black hair is the thickest and the blonde the thinnest. 
 
 Oken has observed that the hair formation is the con 
 nective link between vegetable and animal tissue, and states 
 his opinions as follows: "The fur is the peripheral con 
 nection between the plant and the animal. The hair forms 
 the summit of the vegetables. As the plant requires air 
 and light, so, in the animal kingdom the hair appears where 
 it is most exposed to these elements, namely, on the surl 
 It is not a little remarkable that those mammals which 
 stand nearest the man, the anthropid apes, are distinguished 
 by their great development of the capillary system." 
 
 To the earnest student the words quoted have a d< 
 significance, for they point to the proper course of treatment 
 as nothing else can, and show plainly that the perfect human 
 being should be under no need of stimulating tonics 
 treatments if the open crowned hats and physical culture 
 work could be universally known. Any curative treatments 
 should be extended not only to the scalp but also to the entire 
 body, at least so far as giving advice as to diet, manner <»i 
 exercise and any other point that may improve the general 
 health. 
 
 The majority of scalp diseases could be avoided if more 
 people could be made to realize the necessity f m in 
 
 shampooing and caring for the scalp and hair. Many in- 
 stances might be cited in which excessive falling of the hair 
 has been checked in one or two treatments by the US 
 massage and electricity, and stimulating tonic. Unfor 
 tunately, however, the majority of people neglect the use 
 of any of these measures until the loss of hair has 
 extremely great and the follicles so weakened b) nej 
 of the scalp that it is impossible to do much, exceptin 
 
180 THE SKIN. 
 
 preserve the tresses that are left. There are innumerable 
 cases in which the falling of the hair commences in children 
 of fifteen and continues year by year until as manhood or 
 womanhood is reached the condition is truly mortifying. 
 So much of this trouble is entirely unnecessary that it seems 
 strange indeed to know how few people really have interest 
 enough to acquire knowledge in the proper care of this 
 most important attribute. 
 
 To begin with, few scalps are cleansed as they should be. 
 The majority of people cleanse them frequently but not wise- 
 ly, for in the desire to possess fluffy locks they employ all 
 kinds of injurious substances that sooner or later destroy the 
 vitality of the hair. Among the common recipes for this 
 purpose may be mentioned the use of salts of tartar, strong 
 ammonia water, soda, borax and other articles that are too 
 numerous to mention. Sometimes a simple shampoo is used 
 and the hair is rinsed with another mixture containing an 
 acid. Nitric acid will, it is true, turn the hair yellow, but 
 is so powerful that it can also eat holes in nearly every sub- 
 stance when used pure, while hydrochloric and sulphuric 
 acid can actually dissolve the hair. Thus every strong alkali 
 or acid used will in some way injure the tresses in such a 
 manner that it will be nearly impossible to remedy the 
 trouble. 
 
 Every scalp should be thoroughly cleansed at least as 
 often as once in ten days, and if the hair is to be kept in 
 good condition the process must be one that shall remove 
 the dirt, dust and sebaceous secretions without extracting 
 too much oil. The best shampoo is one not too strongly 
 alkaline that can still leave the hair as it should be, and for 
 this purpose there are several excellent recipes. 
 
 In Germany the use of bran water is extremely common 
 and as it makes a good, though simple, shampoo some of 
 the readers may enjoy trying it. 
 
THE SKIN. [81 
 
 BRAN SHAMPOO. 
 
 Water i gal 
 
 Bran i ql 
 
 Ivory soap y 2 bar 
 
 Boil the bran with the water Eor about an hour and then 
 
 strain and add the soap shaved into small bits. Enough of 
 this is used to make a good lather and the scalp is 
 with it. Perhaps it may be well to explain that in -ham 
 pooing few people really pay enough attention to the scalp. 
 The best shampoo is given in this manner. 
 
 The hair is, of course, smoothly brushed and i- separated 
 strand by strand, while the shampoo mixture is poured upon 
 the scalp. As soon as the surface is well covered the tips 
 of the fingers (not the nails) may be employed to rub the 
 fluid in well, examining from time to time to see that the 
 friction is not too vigorous and also to see if the cleansii 
 proceeding well. As soon as the surface has been well 
 manipulated the mixture should be washed off with warm 
 water and some more of the mixture poured on. The seo >nd 
 process is usually all that is necessary, and as this is fin- 
 ished the hair itself should be washed with the shampoo 
 and the scalp well rinsed, using first very warm water, then 
 cooler, rinsing in water of medium temperature at least twice 
 and ending with water as cold as the patient can endure in 
 order to stimulate the scalp as much as possible. 
 
 The locks may be dried by any of the usual methods, 
 though when practical the use of the towels is best until 
 the heaviest strands are free from moisture. Then an ex- 
 posure to the rays of the sun will be all that is neces 
 and will be the most beneficial method. When this is not 
 practical the use of dry heat is a rapid method and when 
 not used at an extremely high temperature is not injurious. 
 
 Egg shampoos, while popular, do not seem to he the ; 
 
L82 THE SKIN. 
 
 for all scalps. "The following recipe is one much used by 
 those who can secure good results. 
 
 EGG SHAMPOO. 
 
 Yolks of three eggs well beaten. 
 One pint of warm, soft water. 
 One ounce of spirits rosemary. 
 
 Beat well together and use as any shampoo by applying 
 to the scalp. In this much care must be taken to rinse the 
 scalp well. 
 
 For those who wish to employ a practical as well as ex- 
 tremely good recipe, the following will be found excellent. 
 It not only cleanses the scalp but also leaves the hair in a 
 fine condition, and is not particularly expensive. 
 
 SHAMPOO MIXTURE. 
 
 Green soap 4 § 
 
 Castile soap 4 5 
 
 Water dist 1 qt 
 
 Alcohol 85 
 
 Boil the soaps in water until a thick mixture results, and 
 then add the alcohol, and keep in a tightly corked bottle 
 until ready for use. The mixture will, of course, be diluted 
 with water when necessary, and this quantity will be suf- 
 ficient for many shampoos. 
 
 If a tar soap is desired it may be made in the same man- 
 ner, or by simply boiling it up with water until a shampoo 
 of the desired consistency is obtained. 
 
 After the shampoo, while the scalp is still moist, a good 
 tonic may be used to good advantage and should be rubbed 
 in vigorously, unless the scalp is at all irritated. In this 
 even the application of pure witch hazel will be found most 
 soothing. In case the hairs are split the ends should be 
 trimmed and enough clipped away to give an opportunity 
 for a healthy growth. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 1 1" any one has been unfortunate enough to be afflicted 
 
 the presence of vermin, it is well to apply this ointmenl 
 before shampooing : 
 
 Petroleum g .~i 
 
 Olive oil 2 
 
 Bals. Peru i r> 
 
 This ointment may be rubbed in well with a piece of 
 
 white flannel and allowed to remain at least twelve hour-. 
 or if possible, twenty-four. At the end of this time no! only 
 the vermin are destroyed, but the ova arc also made harm- 
 less. To be perfectly safe, it is well to repeat this dose tin- 
 following day, and if the scalp is irritated apply a bland oint- 
 ment. For removing the ova from the hair a dilute solution 
 of acetic acid may be used very successfully, as it dissolves 
 the gluey substance by which the "nots" are secured in 
 place. Even if the head becomes completely infested, it is 
 not necessary to cut the hair, as this treatment will be all 
 that is necessary. 
 
CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 TREATMENT OF SCALP AND HAIR. 
 
 There is an ever increasing demand for some agent that 
 shall stop the falling of hair, and, although every one real- 
 izes that poor health, sedentary occupations and improper 
 modes of living are very frequent causes, still there are 
 numerous cases where the* trouble is caused by lack of care 
 and the consequent weakened condition of the tresses and 
 the uncleanly scalp. The most important requisites for a 
 really fine condition of both hair and scalp apart from the 
 very necessary cleanliness are, ventilation, and the proper 
 amount of friction. In many instances where delicate chil- 
 dren have the trouble of scanty locks as well, the systematic 
 care after weekly shampoos has done wonders. No matter 
 whether the hair is extremely oily or exceptionally dry, 
 long or short, the foundation of all good work is based on 
 the adoption of certain sensible rules, and it may be con- 
 fidently asserted that if more people would understand and 
 practice these instructions there would be few cases of bald 
 heads. 
 
 Massage of the scalp, when coupled with electric treat- 
 ments, is one of the most effective remedies known for re- 
 storing the vitality to the locks and improving the circula- 
 tion of the scalp. It is best given immediately after a 
 shampoo, and if one does not care to have the hair appear 
 oily, instead of moistening the fingers with almond oil, 
 witch hazel may be employed. The hair should be parted in 
 a straight line from the forehead to the back of the neck 
 and the two first fingers of each hand employed to give a 
 rotary motion to the scalp. The fingers are placed about 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 two inches apart, and the seal]) is pressed firml) so thai the 
 
 hair will not pull while the treatment is progtt This 
 
 rotary motion commences invariably at the fronl of the head, 
 and is carried toward the hack, the partings being made 
 at frequent intervals, so that the entire scalp may be manipu 
 lated, and enough witch hazel employed to thoroughl) 
 moisten the surface. After this work has been finished, the 
 fingers of each hand may be spread out under the hair and 
 the rotary motion again tried in this manner. 
 
 This treatment is always finished by the application of a 
 good tonic well rubbed in, and it may be observed thai a 
 tonic so employed has a far better effect than when it is 
 used without the preliminary treatment. The recipe given 
 is highly praised and will be found most efficacious f< i 
 the purpose. 
 
 STIMULATING TONIC. 
 
 Tincture of cantharides 2 5 
 
 Fl. Ext. of jaborandi 1 5 
 
 Glycerine 1 "> 
 
 Alcohol 2 3 
 
 Cologne 1 3 
 
 Water sufficient to make 105 
 
 Bichl. mercury 2 gr 
 
 This mixture will need to be filtered several time- bef 
 it is clear enough for use, and then it will be found extremel) 
 beneficial. 
 
 If very rapid results are desired, or where it is advisable 
 to spend the time the electric treatment should follow tin- 
 use of the tonic, and in any case should he used on everj 
 scalp at least once a week, as it stimulates >o well, that hen 
 efit is sure to follow rapidly. For this purpose the Faradic 
 current is most excellent, and the connections may be made 
 as shown in Figure 15, using the brush for tin- work and 
 
Figure 18. 
 Using the Hairbrush Electrode. 
 
THE SKIN, i ■; 
 
 employing it for at least twenty minutes, [fthe wire bristles 
 seem to be too sharp, and the patient complains of the 
 strength of the current, the wrist electrode, as seen in Figun 
 
 14, may be used and the treatment given in this manner bj 
 allowing- the current to pass through the fingers, and onto 
 the scalp. 
 
 When loss of hair is caused by nervous trouble the us< 
 of electricity is of added value, as it acts as a sedath 
 the nerves as well as a stimulant to the seal]). Headaches, 
 either nervous or neuralgic, are relieved speedily and tints 
 in many instances the health is improved. When the hair 
 is exceptionally oily and the scalp feels cold and looks white 
 and lifeless, the galvanic current may be used to great ben- 
 efit in this manner. A bit of cotton well saturated with a 
 
 Hairbrush Electrode. 
 
 stimulating tonic is placed in the handle connected to the 
 positive pole and placed upon the scalp, while the negative 
 electrode is held in the hand. The entire seal]) is treated 
 in this manner and the treatment is finished by giving the 
 scalp massage as directed. Treatments for this peculiarity 
 must be given at least twice a week and the work done at 
 home should also be of a nature that will assist in this proc 
 ess. For instance, it is advisable to sponge the seal]) at 
 least twice a week with this mixture : 
 
 Alcohol r ^> 
 
 Oil mace 2 3 
 
188 THE SKIN. 
 
 If it is impossible to obtain electric treatments and they 
 are found to be necessary it will be advisable for patients 
 to secure their own batteries with the brush attachment and 
 thus be in a position to use the currents as often as they like. 
 
 In connection with this topic it may be well to mention 
 the practice of clipping or singeing the hair. There has 
 been for many years a difference of opinion on these points, 
 and until recently few of the higher authorities have seen 
 fit to give much attention to the discussion. Now it is de- 
 cided that clipping is the best method, as burning takes 
 away too much of the vitality. The split ends are so nu- 
 merous in some cases that it seems almost impossible to 
 find all of them, but if the hair is twisted in small strands 
 and then roughed by moving the fingers from the tip to- 
 ward the head, the small scissors can easily pass along and 
 get the worst hairs, while subsequent treatments will be 
 sufficient to keep them all well trimmed. This work should 
 be done at least once every four weeks and does much to 
 keep the hair in good condition. By following the hints 
 given here, any head of hair may be kept in good condition 
 and the majority of cases of falling of the tresses stopped. 
 
CHAPTER \\\ I 
 
 THE TREATMENT OF DANDRUFF OR S( I RF. 
 
 Dandruff has been called by a very eminent authority — 
 "catarrh of the epidermis" — and as there arc many van 
 of catarrh so there are numerous complications of this vcr\ 
 disagreeable and common scalp affection. At times 
 short-lived affair, at others, most persistent, and as it is 
 always objectionable, the best manner of treatment should 
 be one of interest to every one so afflicted. 
 
 The skin affected with dandruff is usually anemic and 
 may also be either dry or humid. The itching sensation is 
 sometimes moderate though frequently almost intolerable, 
 while the tissue surrounding the patches of sebaceous matter 
 is generally much reddened and in some instances becomes 
 painful from the constant inflammation. This disease pos- 
 sesses many peculiar manifestations and may be found asso- 
 ciated with other scalp affections. Ordinarily, however, the 
 varieties enumerated are the most commonly seen. 
 
 A form met frequently is that in which greasy white or 
 yellow scales of dry sebaceous matter form on the scalp and 
 even fall from the surface onto the shoulder of the individ- 
 ual. The hair is in some instances matted together, in otl 
 it becomes extremely oily, though in time it generally 
 becomes dry and lusterless and will eventually fall from 
 the follicles. If the destructive process still continues un- 
 checked the follicles themselves become atrophied and bald- 
 ness results, leaving the scalp in the dry shiny cond 
 familiar to all who have been at all observant. The -mall 
 reddish patches found on scalps affected with dandrufl 
 almost invariably caused by the scratching from the fii 
 
190 THE SKIN. 
 
 nails and in the inflammation constantly present in these 
 sections makes the treatment of the dandruff much more dif- 
 ficult, as there is danger of producing an extensive irrita- 
 tion. 
 
 Another variety of dandruff consists of a fine powder- 
 like deposit that seems hardly fastened to the scalp, it is so 
 easily detached, though extremely plentiful. This kind is 
 usually associated with extreme dryness of the skin and 
 even seems inclined to invade portions of the face as well. 
 Still another and one that is fortunately not so common, is 
 found in the appearance of thick scales of a yellowish-gray 
 substance that also appears on the face if left unchecked. 
 In connection with these scalp affections is found another 
 condition that is extremely trying, in which an oily fluid is 
 poured out both on the body and scalp. The ducts of the 
 sebaceous follicles in this condition are plugged with com- 
 edones, and the surface of the skin is usually cold to the 
 touch, showing the necessity for a treatment that shall im- 
 prove the circulation as well as to restore the functions of 
 the glands. 
 
 The treatment of these peculiar conditions must natur- 
 ally be something that shall tend to prevent abnormal collec- 
 tions of fatty material upon the skin, remove the crusts of 
 dandruff without undue irritation and improve the condi- 
 tion of the affected parts. These treatments when suc- 
 cessful mean the expenditure of much time and thought, 
 and the process is one most interesting to the earnest 
 student. In all of this work there must exist a unanimity 
 of purpose between the patient and the masseuse that will 
 tend to most rapid results. 
 
 In severe cases of dandruff the removal of the crusts 
 will frequently seem to increase the loss of hair, as im- 
 poverished by the course of the disease, and with weakened 
 
THE SKIN i -I 
 
 follicles, a complete cleansing such as will be n< will 
 
 sometimes cause a loss iA hair so great that the patient will 
 fear baldness. This loss is absolutely unavoidable and 
 if the treatment is not commenced will begin sooner or later 
 and the baldness will really be a permanent affliction. If. 
 however, the dandruff is removed as indicated, the scalp 
 massaged and treated, and the follicles strengthened, the 
 hair will be encouraged to new growth, and b\ care, future 
 trouble may be avoided. 
 
 The use of a fine comb or any kind of a metallic affair 
 for removing dandruff is not only unnecessary but injur 
 as it fails to remove the crusts while it invariably suco 
 in irritating the scalp and causing more difficulty. For the 
 purpose, therefore, nothing is better than the application of 
 some bland ointment or oil, such as olive oil, almond oil, 
 lard or any other substance that can thoroughly penetrate 
 the crust. To be efficacious, the oil should be applied 
 eral times during the day, and again at night, usi 
 some kind of a head covering to still further aid the work. 
 A most excellent mixture for this purpose may be easily 
 made by using these ingredients. 
 
 SCALP CLEANSER. 
 
 Lanoline i ."> 
 
 Carbolic acid ) 2 3 
 
 Witch Hazel 4 ."> 
 
 Almond oil 4 B 
 
 Melt the lanoline and almond oil together and then while 
 still warm pour in the witch hazel, adding the carbolic 
 when the mixture is nearly cool. 
 
 After the scalp has been soaked with this mixture and 
 the crusts seem to be thoroughly loosened, the oil and cr 
 may be removed by applying the simph shamp< o mad 
 this method. 
 
192 THE SKIN. 
 
 SIMPLE SHAMPOO. 
 
 Green soap 2 5 
 
 Alcohol 2 5 
 
 Rosemary Tinct J4 5 
 
 Dissolve the green soap in the alcohol and add the tinc- 
 ture of rosemary and pour enough on the scalp to cover it, 
 rubbing and applying enough water to make a good lather. 
 It may be necessary to apply this shampoo several times 
 in order to thoroughly cleanse the scalp of the oil and 
 dandruff. After it is cleaned it may be examined, and if it 
 appears reddened and irritated, the following ointment may 
 be rubbed in carefully: 
 
 BLAND OINTMENT. 
 
 Almond oil 5 o 
 
 Bals. Peru 1 5 
 
 Spermaceti 15 
 
 In very severe cases, although this treatment seems 
 wonderfully successful, the end of the second day w T ill find 
 a fresh deposit of the plates of dandruff, and it will be 
 necessary to repeat the operation described for perhaps six 
 or seven times at intervals of every three or four days until 
 the tendency has been cured. As soon as the scalp can be 
 cleaned without appearing at all irritated, a stimulating 
 tonic may be used, and for this purpose nothing is better 
 than this plan. 
 
 Immediately after the shampoo apply to the scalp pure 
 witch hazel and rub it well with the tips of the fingers. 
 Repeat this process again at night and the second or third 
 day use this tonic : 
 
 Alcohol 25 
 
 Tinct. capsicum 1 3 
 
 Glycerine 1 5 
 
 Oil eucalyptus 1 5 
 
 Rose water . . 65 
 
I HE SKIN. 
 
 i)i course, in instances where the first cleansing has been 
 all that is necessary this tonic may be used immediate 
 perhaps, better still, after the first day, using witch h 
 
 first as described. 
 
 The cases where the oily secretions occur are treated in 
 exactly the same manner in the matter of cleaning, as the 
 scalp will need to be well soaked in order to free the scalp 
 from the fatty material. The tonic used will, however, be 
 different than the other, and may be applied immediatel) 
 after the shampoo. It is made thus : 
 
 TONIC FOR OILY SCALP. 
 
 Quinine sulphate 20 gr 
 
 Bay rum 40 
 
 Tinct. cantharides [3 
 
 Tinct. capsicum 1 ~> 
 
 Distilled water 8 § 
 
 In addition to this tonic treatment instructions should 
 be given to the patient to bathe frequently, taking at least 
 three warm baths a week, and if possible finishing each 
 one with a thorough rubbing with salt. 
 
 One of the greatest causes for discontent in the work 
 described here is not so much the failure to remove the 
 dandruff, for the method described will positively do that, 
 but in impressing upon people that the treatment must be 
 continued until the scalp is in an absolutely healthful con- 
 dition. When the loss of hair has been extremely great 
 and the condition has been found to be complicated with 
 eczema, even longer periods are required. Even when no 
 complication exists and the loss of hair has been marked, it 
 is often impossible to do much excepting to prevent further 
 loss, for if the follicles are dead no new hair will appear 
 in these portions. 
 
 Those who are possessed of that very desirable requis 
 
194 THE SKIN. 
 
 persistence, will positively succeed in curing the most 
 obstinate cases of dandruff, and the competent masseuse 
 should have no difficulty in impressing upon her patients 
 the necessity for application. After the condition has been 
 cured shampoos should be taken at least every ten days, 
 and if possible one treatment a week for scalp massage in 
 tonnection with lelectrical applications. Of course, the 
 proper amount of rubbing will be done at home, and the 
 scalp and hair should be thus kept in extremely good condi- 
 tion. In any and every case, the applications of oil first, 
 are positively necessary, and must be made frequently, as 
 directed, if the results are to be good. 
 
CHAPTER \\\ ||. 
 
 HOW TO DYE AND BLEACH THE H AIR. 
 
 The universal desire to conceal or disguise the first 
 unwelcome heralds of age— gray hairs— is so openlj 
 knowledged that even those who disapprove of the prj 
 
 of using dyes, still admit the longing to be almost a natural 
 one. It may be of interest to the ambitious to learn thai 
 the oldest prescription on record is for a hair dye, and is 
 credited to no less a person than Shesch, the mother-in-law 
 of the first king of Egypt. Whether Madame Shesch in- 
 tended this for her daughter Teta or wished to preserve 
 her own appearance no one seems to know, but as th< 
 ords state that the dye was hers we may take it for granted 
 that she also made use of it. 
 
 Why the hair turns gray has never been satisfactorily 
 decided. Some learned men declare that the blanching 
 comes from the disappearance of the pigment cells. Others 
 have by examination found the pigment as abundant as 
 ever, but the corticle substance so dense that the color does 
 not show through. There is no doubt that nervous strain, 
 illness and heredity as well as advancing years may be cited 
 as influences in this matter, and as in so many instai 
 the growth of hair is as abundant as ever there can therefore 
 be no question as to the healthful condition of the scalp. 
 Whatever may be the cause there has as yet been discovered 
 no cure, so the man or woman who wishes to hide from 
 associates has no choice but in the application of a dye. In 
 many instances this process is a necessity, as the ap] 
 of gray hair would mean dismissal from lucrative p 
 so in considering ways and means it is well to remen 
 this fact. 
 
196. THE SKIN. 
 
 There is an impression that hair may be colored perma- 
 nently, but this is erroneous, for nothing can be dyed but 
 the free portion outside of the follicle. Hence the process 
 must be repeated from time to time, as the hair near the 
 scalp will grow out a natural color, while constant brush- 
 ing and washing will naturally take off part of the stain. 
 The requisites for a good dye are not easy to fulfill, for 
 everv one demands that the mixture shall be easy to apply, 
 of a natural appearance and durable. It is almost impossible 
 to find a dye made by an amateur that will fill these require- 
 ments, though a few of the manufactured articles will posi- 
 tively do so. However, as people love to dabble in the fas- 
 cinating art of making strange mixtures some of the simple 
 recipes will follow. 
 
 The vegetable and organic dyes are usually harmless, 
 next to these come iron and permanganate of potassium, 
 then copper, bismuth and bichromate of potassium ; next per- 
 oxide of hydrogen, silver and finally lead. The last two, 
 of course, are generally recognized as used, though not by 
 careful workers. Fresh walnut hulls are much used, and 
 this method is really harmless. Henna is much employed to 
 stain the hair red and is so effective that even black hair 
 will yield to its influence. By mixing henna with indigo a 
 shade of brown is made and by using the indigo after the 
 hair has been stained with the henna a very beautiful black 
 is possible. 
 
 The process is very simple. First comes a shampoo that 
 must remove all the oil from the hair. Then with great 
 care single, strands are smeared with a paste made by mix- 
 ing henna with warm water. The hair is then left accord- 
 ing to the shade desired. If it is to be red and the hair is 
 naturally dark, at least two hours will be necessary. Light 
 hair will not take longer than an hour. 
 
NIK SKIN 
 
 It the color is to be black it may be treated again with a 
 paste made in the same manner with indigo powder and 
 water. During- this process the hair becomes a greenish 
 
 black, later turning into a fine black that is very permanent. 
 This process is even said to be beneficial, a- Ear a- increas 
 ing the growth of the hair is concerned, and in Turkey the 
 manes and tails of horses are dyed red by means of henna. 
 If one wishes to use the two ingredients at the same time 
 the following formula may be of use, as it is -aid that b) 
 the application of this paste the hair may be dyed any shade 
 from light to dark chestnut brown : 
 
 Henna [ g 
 
 Indigo 3 .1 
 
 Water 4 § 
 
 The hand of an expert is required in this art, and in the 
 use of henna it must be remembered that after the first 
 dyeing unless the process is continued the most incredible 
 shades appear, green, violet, and a queer copper color, mak- 
 ing the appearance so weird that it is impossible to be seen 
 in public places, until the color has worn off. 
 
 For bleaching the hair the agent most popular is per- 
 oxide of hydrogen, and if properly used it may at least be 
 said to be harmless, though the color produced i> never at 
 all natural and the constant touching up required bee inn- 
 most monotonous. The application of the peroxide is most 
 simple, and is easily made by the use of a small brush. The 
 hair is first washed carefully and the peroxide poured into 
 a saucer and the mixture applied. One application prod 
 a great change and more may be made a- necessary. Am- 
 monia is added in some instances, but it simply hasten- the 
 process and cannot do good while it does much harm by 
 drying the locks. After the hair is thoroughly bleach* 
 needs constant watching to keep it in presentable condition. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 It must remain as light as it is always, unless it is allowed 
 to grow out the natural color again, or unless it is dyed. 
 After it is dyed it is impossible to rebleach it without caus- 
 ing the most disagreeable complications. 
 
 The use of peroxide to lighten or brighten auburn hair is 
 harmless and effective, and it may be used to advantage by 
 using an equal quantity of water and applying it to the hair 
 after a shampoo, then fanning until it is dry. Muddy, 
 brown hair may also be brightened in the same way without 
 injuring it. 
 
 A good dye for gray hair or rather one that will restore 
 the natural color is hard to describe. The following recipe 
 is said to be extremely effective, and at any rate has the 
 advantage of being less harmful than most of the dyes. 
 
 HAIR DYE. 
 
 Southern wood V/2 lb 
 
 Olive oil 1 qt 
 
 Port wine 1 pt 
 
 Bruise the wood and boil it in the olive oil and strain 
 through a cloth. Get fresh quantities of the wood and re- 
 peat the operation twice. Then add the port wine and 
 allow it to stand several days before using. This is too 
 oily to suit most people so the next recipe will be more popu- 
 lar. It is said to have been advocated by Lola Montez. 
 
 INSTANTANEOUS HAIR DYE. 
 
 Gallic acid 10 gr 
 
 Tinct. sesquichloride or iron I % 
 
 Acetic acid 1 § 
 
 Dissolve the gallic acid in the sesquichloride and add the 
 acetic acid, wash the hair and apply dye when it is thor- 
 oughly dry. 
 
 Other dyes extremely popular contain excess of lead, 
 
THE SKIN 
 
 and as there arc numerous cases on record when I 
 
 this description haw caused death or perhaps thai affli 
 even worse than death, paralysis, u is well to be careful in 
 applying- any mixture to the scalp unless one has some 
 knowledge of its properties. The dye safest to use is that 
 
 not applied to the scalp but to the hair, and which ma\ be 
 used as often as required. The best dyes as a rule come in 
 two portions marked either A and B or I and 2, and are 
 used in the following- manner : 
 
 After the hair has been thoroughly cleansed with - 
 and water and then dried the solution marked A is applied 
 with a small brush, drawing it from the roots to the tips 
 and saturating the hair well. It is then allowed to dry, 
 and as soon as possible the second solution applied, using a 
 different brush for the process. The hair is again dried, if 
 possible in the sun, and in twenty-four hours the super- 
 fluous dye is washed off with warm water. Most of the 
 trouble coming from the use of dyes may be traced to this 
 Jast point. Many people imagine that it is useless to wash 
 off the dye the next day and allow it to remain, thus can- 
 ing much injury to the hair. In order to produce just the 
 desired shade a most accurate knowledge of chemist r 
 necessary, hence the difficulty in preparing any of the dye- 
 that are supposed to change the hair from one shad 
 any other. 
 
 The woman who desires to obtain the besl results should 
 get the most reliable preparation, and if possible ha\ 
 action explained to her. If she cannot afford to have a i 
 petent hair dresser apply the dye she should follow 
 directions to the letter and the results may he very • 
 The shampoo should be made imperative, as it is all 
 impossible to apply any dye and have it act properlj m 
 the hair is washed. Another point n\ importance is the 
 
200 THE SKIN. 
 
 kind of shampoo used. One that will not produce com- 
 plications by inducing peculiar combinations of chemicals 
 is, of course, necessary, and hence it is well always to use 
 a mixture, the ingredients of which are known. For that 
 reason the shampoo mixture mentioned in a previous chap- 
 ter will be the best for general use. 
 
 In using any dye the skin of the face should not be 
 touched by the liquid, and the dress should be protected by 
 a rubber cloth, while the hands will, of course, be encased 
 in rubber gloves. The bottles containing the staining mix- 
 tures should be placed on metallic trays or on something 
 that cannot be discolored, and the utmost care taken not to 
 allow drops of the dye to be spattered on the clothing or 
 carpet or anything that may be injured. A little expe- 
 rience very speedily shows the average woman that the art 
 of dyeing the hair is one that deserves recognition as a 
 most difficult and delicate process, unless there exists that 
 natural adaptability that enables one to know intuitively 
 just what to do and how to do it. 
 
 Finally, although there are given so many precautions 
 and warnings, it is not fair to frighten those who feel the 
 necessity of using dyes, for there are thousands of people 
 who have used them successfully for years without any in- 
 jury to either the scalp or hair. The process is a peculiar 
 one, and it must be done with the greatest of attention to 
 minute detail if it is to be pleasing. This performed, the 
 results will be as desired. 
 
CHAPTER XXVIII, 
 
 now TO GROW THIN. 
 
 The woman who carries in addition to the regulation 
 
 number of burdens, that additional one — superfluous i1< 
 has indeed a right to demur. 
 
 For her, life can never be exceedingly comfortable. K\ 
 effort tires her. Changes in temperature may mean actual 
 suffering, and physically she can never be at her best while 
 this huge load of fat presses on all of the vital organs, short- 
 ening her breath, impeding the action of the heart and 
 liver, and almost invariably producing some serious com- 
 plication. 
 
 The accumulation of flesh usually commences about the 
 age of twenty-eight, sometimes a little earlier or later, and 
 though frequently found in people inclined to be physically 
 indolent, there are exceptions to this rule, for the busy 
 housewives are often quite monumental in appearance, 
 though leading active lives. In such instances the food, and 
 body exercises and baths will be found of the im- 
 
 portance in the process of reducing flesh. 
 
 In respect to this question, as in many others, the various 
 authorities have met success in different ways, although 
 they have all agreed upon the main items. There are many 
 phases to be considered in this work before attempting 
 and among the most important are those regarding the dan- 
 ger to the physical well-being by reducing so rapidly that 
 the organs may be weakened. This rapid proo 
 inevitably the result of taking strong drugs, and the 
 thoughtful person will hardly care to consider such 
 Bathing, too, may be dangerous if the temperatur< 
 
202 THE SKIX. 
 
 bath is high enough to cause increased heart action in one 
 whose heart is already weakened, while exercising must be 
 undertaken with caution and according to set rules, if it is 
 to be of benefit. 
 
 After considering well the phases to be avoided, the 
 student should first learn the theory of treatment, then fol- 
 low it, and inevitably she will find herself wonderfully im- 
 proved in health as well as greatly decreased in weight. 
 Even with organic troubles, those who are too heavy may 
 manage to become a great deal smaller, while ordinary, fat 
 people can easily make themselves just what they desire to 
 be if they will but persevere in the treatments indicated. 
 
 The cause of obesity is said to be a disturbance of cell 
 activity. An over-use of carbo-hydrates tends to increase 
 the fat greatly, w r hile alcoholic stimulants or an excessive 
 diet of fats and starches also aid in this work. 
 
 The effects of obesity may be seen in the sluggish con- 
 dition of the circulation, torpid liver, weakened heart and 
 kidneys and disinclination to exertion, both mental and 
 physical. The vital capacity is also much less, and experi- 
 ment has shown that for every kilo of weight above the 
 average, there is a corresponding decrease of 37 c. c. in this 
 respect. 
 
 In reducing the flesh the dietetic treatment is all-impor- 
 tant, and should be carried out accordingly, with due regard 
 to the necessity for systematic bathing and exercising as 
 well. The best method is naturally that which not only 
 reduces but also performs the work without weakening the 
 patient. In some instances where there is anemia present 
 with weakness of the heart, the treatment must be an in- 
 vigorating one, and in all methods there should be exercised 
 an effort to avoid measures that are too severe to be con- 
 sistent with health. 
 
THE SKI] 
 
 Banting, Ebstein and Oertel are th< most quoted autl 
 
 ities on this subject, and each plan has certain advai 
 but none can be used in all cases. A strid avoidan 
 
 the foods of a certain nature is apt also to impair 1 1 
 tive properties, so in general practice it is well to limit the 
 diet, but also to use as many articles as possible in strict n 
 eration. For instance, the use of sweets may be supplied 
 by saccharine, the starchy foods may be represented by the 
 bread and the peas and beans allowed, thus making tin- diet 
 a mixed one. The following list will be found suffi< 
 for the majority of cases. 
 
 BREAKFAST. 
 
 One egg, either poached or boiled, one cup of coffee 
 tea sweetened with saccharine if necessary, toasted bread, 
 wheat bread, or graham, 2 ounces fruits, such as oral 
 grape fruit, or apples. (One only being allowed.) 
 
 Immediately after breakfast a two-mile walk should be 
 taken if possible, if not, the use of the body exercises may 
 be tried, paying especial attention to those calling for bend- 
 ing, such as I, II, III and IV. This work should consume 
 at least fifteen minutes, and following the exercises the 
 body should be sponged off with salt water. 
 
 Two hours after time of meal a glass of some mineral 
 water should be taken, preferably Vichy one day, K 
 the next. 
 
 NOON MEAL. 
 
 Soup, 3 ounces; fish, 3 ounces; roast or boiled b 
 veal, game or poultry, 6 to 8 ouno 
 ounces; bread, 1 ounce; fruit, 3 or 4 ounc< 
 of any light wine. Xo liquid aside from this is to be I 
 with the meal. 
 
 Two hours after meal a glass of mineral water. 
 
204 THE SKIN. 
 
 EVENING MEAL. 
 
 Caviar, iy 2 ounces; i to 2 soft-boiled eggs; beefsteak, 
 fowl or game, 5 ounces ; salad, 1 ounce ; cheese, 1 dram ; 
 bread, 1 ounce ; fruit, or water,. 5 ounces. 
 
 Before retiring, a complete body bath in warm water may 
 be taken and the entire body well scrubbed with soap and 
 water, followed by a cold sponge, unless the action of the 
 cold water is unendurable. Following the bath, the breath- 
 ing exercises may be practiced, especially the last four, al- 
 though all of them will be found excellent. 
 
 In twenty-four hours after the beginning of this pro- 
 gram, weight will have been lost, and the decrease should 
 be steady until the average weight has been reached, when 
 the strict process can, of course, be stopped, and by atten- 
 tion to food and exercise the accumulation of flesh dis- 
 couraged. 
 
 In connection with exercising and bathing, care must 
 be taken to prevent the skin from becoming withered or 
 flabby after this loss of flesh, and hence at least once a week 
 a thorough massage of the body should be given, while mas- 
 sage of the face and neck should be an everyday affair, 
 for this follow the directions given in chapters on massage. 
 
 In cases of nervous dyspepsia, the use of electricity 
 has been most beneficial, and the current may be used over 
 the spine, at back of head, and upon the diaphragm with 
 most excellent results. 
 
 Bodily exercise is, of course, of much importance, and 
 persistence means that where the flesh was, firm muscles 
 will exist, and the creases and crevices so dangerous to 
 beauty will not appear. For those who feel that the decrease 
 in flesh endangers the appearance, the following lotion may 
 be used with extremely good effect. It is best applied after 
 the evening bath. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 Rose water 
 
 Tinct. of benz< >in i 
 
 Milk of almonds _• 
 
 Sulphate of aluminum 
 
 i 
 
 . » 
 
 
 Dissolve thoroughly ami filter until clear. Keep in a 
 dark bottle in a cool place and apply with a sponge daily. 
 
 The cold sponge is especially recommended after the 
 ordinary warm bath, and even the most delicate may in 
 time accustom themselves to this by commencing with tin- 
 use of tepid water, and gradually adding the colder until 
 the desired temperature has been reached. Salt may be 
 added to the water with very good effect or the towels may 
 be dipped in a saturated solution of salt allowed to dry ami 
 then used to scrub the body with. The effect of this fric- 
 tion is most beneficial. 
 
 The following table of weights is the one most generally 
 accepted, and any great deviation from this either way 
 should be corrected as being inconsistent with health. The 
 normal woman should not vary more than two or three 
 pounds from these figures. If she does, her only remedy 
 is a strict observance of the rules given for the correction 
 of this condition. 
 
 5 feet I inch 120 to 123 pounds 
 
 5 feet 2 inches 126 to 128 pounds 
 
 5 feet 3 inches 133 to 135 pounds 
 
 5 feet 4 inches 136 to 138 pounds 
 
 5 feet 5 inches 142 to 144 pounds 
 
 5 feet 6 inches 145 to 147 pounds 
 
 5 feet 7 inches 149 to 151 pounds 
 
 5 feet 8 inches 155 to 157 pounds 
 
 5 feet 9 inches 162 to 165 pounds 
 
 5 feet 10 inches 169 to 171 pounds 
 
 5 feet 11 inches 174 to 176 pounds 
 
 6 feet 178 to [82 pounds 
 
CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 HOW TO BECOME PLUMP. 
 
 The thin woman may glory in being willowy in her 
 youth, but as in the early thirties she sees the deep creases 
 and the tiny lines that appear with the evident determina- 
 tion of acquiring a permanent position, there also comes 
 the desire to acquire a few pounds of flesh to assist in cov- 
 ering the too apparent bones. 
 
 All wasting diseases will produce this excessive leanness, 
 but if there is no trouble of this kind to contend with, and 
 no inherited tendency, much can be done toward correcting 
 this condition. It is peculiar, to say the least, in studying 
 the best measures for putting on flesh to find how many of 
 the rules for taking it off must be observed. 
 
 Exercise in the open air is as important for one as for 
 the other. The body exercises for development are always 
 to be used, while those in breathing, found the very best 
 basis for this treatment. Exercises especially beneficial in 
 this respect are those in which the abdomen and chest are 
 made to expand against pressure. Of course, in perform- 
 ing any of these movements care will be observed to carry 
 none of them to excess, and to avoid becoming over-ex- 
 hausted at any time. 
 
 Bathing may be used almost as extensively as in the 
 case of superfluous flesh, with the difference that after the 
 use of a very warm bath much time should be employed 
 upon the massage of the body, using as much oil or skin 
 food as the pores will absorb. After a bath of this kind 
 much rest should be taken and a light lunch eaten before 
 
THE SKIN 
 
 dressing. For instance, a glass of milk and a roll 01 
 
 or poached eggs and cocoa or a glass of ale will be found 
 
 excellent foods for this condition. 
 
 The bath, most beneficial for tins purp that ob 
 
 tamed by pouring into the tub two quarts of bran, and 
 allowing it to remain in the warm water for twenty minutes 
 before entering. This bran may be used for rubbing the 
 body by mixing- j t with castile soap, and after a vigorous 
 friction, the body should remain in the water for at lei 
 twenty minutes, finishing with a thorough massj the 
 
 entire body. 
 
 Each day after luncheon, a rest should be taken 
 and upon rising if there is any appetite for food, a cup 
 chocolate or glass of milk or tea with toast max be taken. 
 Much sleep is extremely beneficial, as the majority of thin 
 people are exceedingly active, and do not get the resl they 
 require. 
 
 Many women have found the use of porter or ale to be- 
 most beneficial, but as the use of these stimulants is often 
 attended by a desire for something of the kind constantly, it 
 is well to use remedies less apt to be attended with bad 
 after-efTects. Any sour wine such as claret or Rhine, or 
 the use of the many acid fruits, such as lemons, orang 
 grape fruit or limes should be avoided. 
 
 When the one who is thin is also exceedingly m 
 sufficient rest must be made a positive law, with the use of 
 electricity if her nerves seem entirely beyond control and a 
 tonic of hypophosphites to assist in toning up the system. 
 The following diet will be found the best in mosl conditions. 
 
 BREAKFAST. 
 
 Cup of tea or coffee with as much cream and milk as 
 can possibly be employed. Any of the cereal foods, ben 
 or fruit with sugar, baked potatoes and a lamb chop. 
 
208 THE SKIN. 
 
 This menu will seem rather elaborate to many, as the 
 "no breakfast" fad is widespread, and both corpulent and 
 emaciated women have accustomed themselves to either 
 nothing at all in the morning or one cup of coffee 
 with perhaps a slice of unbuttered toast. All thin people 
 should make an effort to make this morning meal a sub- 
 stantial one, as it does more to keep up the strength and 
 prevent undue strain than any other meal in the day. 
 
 In the middle of the morning after exercise in the open 
 air it is well again to take a light lunch and this may consist 
 of toasted crackers with a glass of milk or eggnogg. After 
 this lunch, of course, the ordinary occupations may be pur- 
 sued as usual, and at noon the following menu will be 
 found the best. 
 
 LUNCHEON. 
 
 Potatoes, any of the green vegetables, omelette, bread 
 and butter and fruits, cold meats and milk, chocolate, or 
 cocoa, or milk. 
 
 After lunch a rest of at least one-half hour should be 
 taken, or if possible a long nap, followed by a lunch during 
 the middle of the afternoon. 
 
 DINNER. 
 
 Any of the nourishing soups, fish of any kind, meats, 
 such as rare, roast beef, chicken, sweets and fruits. Beer, 
 porter. Burgundy or a little sweet Champagne may be taken. 
 
 After dinner a little light exercise should follow, and 
 especial care should be used to avoid making the hours for 
 retiring late. The warm bath, as described, can well be 
 taken at night with the careful massage following and a 
 glass of milk may be taken just before retiring for the night. 
 
 The diet in all cases will be found to be most important, 
 and excesses should be guarded against. Although sweets 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 are fattening, too man} are apt to cause emaciation, ju 
 surely as the average use encourages corpulency. In n< 
 
 every ease of extreme thinness, the patient is found to have 
 a peculiar appetite. Rarely is there observed a healthful 
 longing for food best suited to her condition. The desire 
 may be for sweets or for sour fruits or pickles, but it is 
 invariably for something that will injure the digestion. 
 
 Tendencies of this kind may be overcome by persistent 
 effort and determination. If necessary, a good tonic may 
 be employed to aid in the work. In any event, the deter- 
 mination to acquire a healthy appetite may be met with 
 success, if sufficient interest is shown in the matter. 
 
 The matter of nerves must be especially considered in 
 these instances, and if the subject is extremely irritable, 
 allowing every small matter to disturb her, she must simply 
 call a halt in her round of duties by weeding out every un- 
 necessary task, and spending sufficient time to thoroughly 
 cultivate that state of calm and repose necessary to peace of 
 mind. The rest cure may be taken in the heart of the city 
 as well as in the quiet of the country, for wherever there 
 is sufficient will, there is bound to be success, and this may 
 be easily proved by any one who will make the effort. 
 
CHAPTER XXX. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT. 
 
 It is not alone for the benefit obtained in acquiring a 
 graceful carriage, or in the symmetrical development of the 
 body, that the proper system of exercising is advocated ; but 
 chiefly on account of the positive increase in both mental 
 and physical capacity for sustained effort, obtained by those 
 who have the will to adopt, and the perseverance to prac- 
 tice the movements best suited to their needs. 
 
 It cannot be denied that much harm has been done by 
 the use of exercises too violent for those with weakened 
 constitutions or any organic trouble of the heart. However, 
 in teaching of the wonderful results to be obtained from 
 this work, full emphasis has been placed upon the absolute 
 necessity for caution, and in addition, only the exercises 
 that may be attempted with perfect safety have been selected 
 for lessons. 
 
 Exercise should not be relegated to young, but should 
 be encouraged in the middle-aged and old people as a means 
 of preventing fatty changes, and the process of degenera- 
 tion peculiar to age, in which the blood vessels wither away 
 and thus cause excessive tissue waste. 
 
 These processes may in a great measure be prevented 
 by persistent and systematic effort to keep all of the muscles 
 in working condition, as well as in maintaining a good cir- 
 culation. In this manner the capillaries and blood vessels 
 instead of contracting, may be kept at their greatest capac- 
 ity, thus insuring sufficient activity. 
 
 The anecdote of the man who commenced lifting the 
 calf from the time it was two days old, and thus proved 
 
THE SKI1 • (U 
 
 that when it became a huge animal he Could Still | 
 the same feat hecan.se his muscles had been tram-: and 
 gradually adapted to the increased effort, is a v <i\ 
 illustration of what daily work will do for ever) one. It 
 it could be kept up, or rather if it were continued a 
 should be, atul proper vigor could he maintained, the man 
 ot sixty would be far more supple than tin boj of sixteen. 
 
 One of the most prominent educators m this country, 
 who was opposed to anything in the wax of violent i 
 cise, or indeed even to mild efforts, or anything else, that 
 would take him away from his books, has recent 1\ been 
 made the object of some very curious experiments in order 
 to prove that a man of fifty-five could he trained in the 
 greatest part of the work done by the college athl 
 The educator had declared so vigorously that he could 
 never be improved by this method of development that 
 when a tempting wager was made he finally agreed to 
 undergo training for six months, adopting the diet a- well 
 as the work lined out by the advocate of physiological de- 
 velopment. 
 
 At the end of three months the stiff lines and awkward 
 gait had been supplanted by an erect carriage and 
 blance of ease. Six months found him a different man, not 
 only physically but also in regard to capacity for mental 
 effort, a matter easily proved, as this new work did not 
 interfere with the ordinary duties of life. At this time 
 arrangements were made to prolong the training for one 
 year, and then to his delight he found he could perform 
 the following exercises with ease : 
 
 He could stand on a block eight inches high, and, reach- 
 ing down, lay his hands on the floor, palms downward. I fe 
 could lay his hands flat back on his wrists and easil) 
 his toes in his mouth. In addition to these pr 
 
212 THE SKIN. 
 
 pleness he could hold a cane horizontally, clasping each 
 hand about it behind his back and then raise it above his 
 head. A trial at raising the hands alone will soon convince 
 any one how difficult it must have been to acquire the abil- 
 ity to do this last exercise. 
 
 Of course the results of this work were quite suffi- 
 cient to make an ardent enthusiast of the educator, and 
 as a consequence the athletic portion of the college boys 
 soon found an ally who assisted them whenever possible. 
 
 Instances without number may be cited, showing that 
 those who are in the habit of exercising habitually will 
 not only live longer and happier lives, but will also enjoy 
 comparative immunity from sickness and attacks of melan- 
 cholia and will be decidedly prone to the comfortable con- 
 dition in which neither the extreme of corpulency or emaci- 
 ation will be experienced. Twenty minutes spent in this 
 work each day will do wonders for any one who is earnest 
 in the work within a year's time. The incfeased interest 
 among women is already showing wonderful results in the 
 finely proportioned types styled the American Girl. 
 
 Especial emphasis should be placed upon the benefits 
 to be derived from this work by those who have passed 
 middle age. There has been a feeling that all efforts of 
 this kind were unavailing excepting during the earlier years, 
 and as a consequence the interest has not been as great as 
 it should be. No one is ever too old to be benefited to 
 some degree by work carried on properly, and every person 
 should be convinced of this fact. There are too many in- 
 stances of activity among people who have passed the al- 
 loted threescore and ten to make one feel that there is 
 anything like an age limit in these enlightened days. 
 
 Full breathing stands at the head of every list as most 
 important as well as absolutely necessary to perfect health. 
 
THE SKIN. 
 
 The room one sits in may be filled with fr< but 
 
 unless it is taken into the bod) correctly by an effort that 
 
 shall not only fill the lungs, but als< ntire 
 
 abdominal region, breathing is not properly done. In all 
 labored respiration, the abdominal muscles act bj dimin 
 ishing the abdominal cavity, and pushing the contents up 
 against the diaphragm. The contraction of the diaphr; 
 by increasing the intra-abdominal pressure, favors the 
 venous blood current in the abdomen toward the vena 
 inferior. Thus the act of breathing correctly and deepl) 
 is seen to have an immense influence in actively exercising 
 the organs so vitally important if health is to be maintained. 
 
 Breathing should be done through the nostril-, becau 
 as the current of air passes through the pharyngo-nasal cav- 
 ity, it is rendered warm and moist, and the irritation of the 
 mucous membranes of the air passages by the cold air is 
 prevented. Small particles of soot or other foreign sub- 
 stances adhere to and become embedded in the mu< 
 covering and are carried outward by the peculiar mechan- 
 ism of the respiratory passages, and finally disagreeable 
 odor and impurities of the air are detected by the sense ol 
 smell. 
 
 Oxygen, the great purifier, is present in large quanti- 
 ties in fresh air, combined with nitrogen and carbonic 
 acid gas — C0 2 . Taken into the body by the means 
 respiration it revivifies the blood, assists in the construc- 
 tion of the new tissue as well as in the breaking down oi 
 old. Air once breathed has been deprived of a great 
 of its oxygen, and possesses a marked increase in I 
 Hence, in order to take in as much of the lit. 
 gen and as little of the inert CO a as possible, the - 
 air should be breathed but once, tints making pen 
 tilation a necessity in all apartment-. 
 
214 THE SKIN. 
 
 Fresh air is as necessary for the most robust as for the 
 weakly, and the allowance of space necessary to secure 
 sufficient air for each individual should always be con- 
 sidered in respect to the healthful condition of rooms. Or- 
 dinarily 800 cubic feet should be allowed for a healthy 
 person, and 1,000 cubic feet for one who is sick. In addi- 
 tion to the allowance of air, care must be taken to insure 
 the free admission of sunlight, in order to get rid of the 
 organic matter that is constantly given off. A very good 
 illustration of the fact that this organic matter given off 
 by means of the breath is filled with numerous bacteria 
 may be tried by breathing into a jar of distilled water, and 
 then placing the vessel aside. In a very short time the 
 water becomes fetid. Hence it will be seen that to insure 
 perfect ventilation, as well as the best condition of an 
 apartment, both sun and air are required. 
 
 In learning to breathe correctly the exercises should be 
 taken in a room previously well ventilated or by an open 
 window. Any muscular effort causes an increase in the 
 C0 2 given out, so much more care must be exerted to keep 
 the pure air in sufficient quantity to make the exercises 
 beneficial. The good effects of correct breathing are re- 
 markable. Chests expand, stomachs recede, cheeks show 
 more color and eyes are brighter, while the general health 
 is of course far better. The process of breathing should 
 not be spasmodic, but natural, with a certain rhythm. 
 Those who puff out their cheeks and go through numerous 
 other facial contortions, such as gasping and gurgling, are 
 harming themselves in more ways than one, and are do- 
 ing absolutely no good. Care must be taken to learn the 
 proper method, and then the results will be all that can be 
 desired. 
 
 Rapid, violent breathing is to be avoided, as it may 
 
THE SKI] ,, 
 
 produce serious injury to the pulmonai Shallow 
 
 breathing: is of no benefit whatever, and in this irei 
 portant work every exercise should be performed with the 
 mind absolutely concentrated upon the subject, a 
 with a steady determination to go at the work with the 
 intention of producing the effect desired. The time 
 to breathing may be increased from day to day. It 
 cises seem too difficult for the first trial they may be 
 easier until finally they can be accomplished with tl: 
 most ease. 
 
 The busy woman, who feels every moment is precious, 
 if properly dressed, may practice deep breathing as she 
 walks to her daily occupation. With shoulders tl 
 back, head erect and hands at her side she may inhale 
 slowly while she counts five, exhale while counting seven, 
 and so on until the utmost capacity for the lungs has finally 
 been reached. This, of course, means that her clothing 
 must be worn so comfortably that the abdominal mus 
 may be used with every breath. 
 
 If the great distance precludes an attempt at walking, 
 the breathing exercises may be practiced upon retiring at 
 night, and in fact some of the most excellent arc performed 
 while in a recumbent position. During the day, if the 
 head feels heavy and there is a sensation of weariness 
 makes the work drag, five minutes of (\vc\) breathing by the 
 open window will send the blood bounding thr< ugh the 
 veins and so clear the brain that the capacit) i m- 
 
 plishing is almost doubled. 
 
 So enthusiastic are the advocates of correct breathii 
 that it is said one of the foremost acti 
 great part of her success to her knowledge of this art. It' 
 tried beyond her strength by some strongl} emotion 
 . or if feeling unequal to the work before her, 
 
216 THE SKIN. 
 
 diately gets into the open air for long enough to practice 
 inhaling and exhaling ten deep breaths, and returns feel- 
 ing refreshed and invigorated. 
 
 It is frequently impossible for any person of ordinary 
 environment to go through the long and vigorous courses 
 prescribed by those who make a specialty of this work. 
 Hence in giving the following exercises care has been taken 
 to select those that will sufficiently exercise the vital organs 
 as well as the muscles and yet will not be in any way in- 
 jurious. Many excellent exercises will need to be omitted, 
 simply because it is impossible for any one to do them with- 
 out instruction. However, if these that are given are prac- 
 ticed as they should be there will be found little need of 
 anything else. Every woman, no matter what her occupa- 
 tion, needs to learn and practice deep breathing. The fol- 
 lowing examples will suffice as illustrations of the most 
 important portions of this work. 
 
 Exercise I. Assume a recumbent position by lying flat 
 on the couch or floor and relaxing all of the muscles. Then 
 inhale slowly through the nostrils, and as deliberately ex- 
 hale. Place the hands lightly on the abdomen, and if the 
 breath is taken correctly the abdominal muscles will 
 become inflated first, then the chest. In order to make 
 the work rhythmical commence by mentally counting five 
 while inhaling, and seven while exhaling. Repeat five 
 times, gradually adding to the count as the strength in- 
 creases, and always being careful to perform the work 
 methodically. This exercise is excellent for practice in 
 inflating the lungs properly and may be practiced in bed 
 before rising, thus commencing the day well. 
 
 Exercise II. Still in a recumbent position exhale fully, 
 pressing lightly with both hands upon the abdomen. In- 
 hale fully, resisting pressure, which should increase with 
 

 INK SKIN. 
 
 each time the exercise is performed. These two 
 
 will make the diaphragm strong and elastic, and 
 tire lung tissue will be expanded. Repeal this tr. 
 at first, increasing gradually. 
 
 Exercise III. Assume military position. In ord< 
 ascertain if this is properly done, stand with the 1 
 touching the wall, and if the hack of head, shouldi 
 tocks and heels touch, the attitude is correct. Then place 
 
 Figure I. Figure 1 1. 
 
 hands on side close to armpits, as illustrated in Figure I. 
 and resist expansion of side muscles. Exhale with | 
 sure still continued, and during the exercise | 
 mental counting, as directed in first exercise 
 five times. 
 
 Exercise IV. Assume attitude as in Figure I. pi 
 hands on upper part of chest and again inl 
 
218 
 
 THE SKIN. 
 
 pressure of the hands, exhale without the pressure. Con- 
 tinue the counting as before and use the same number of 
 times. 
 
 Exercise V. Assume attitude seen in Figure II, and 
 
 Figure III. 
 
 Figure IV r . 
 
 inhale while raising the hands straight out and up, exhale 
 while coming back to original position. Continue counting 
 as before. This work is excellent for raising the chest 
 walls and for lengthening the waist. 
 
 Exercise VI. Assume the attitude of Figure II, and 
 exhale while dropping the hands at the side, inhale while 
 bringing them up to original position. Continue counting 
 as before, and after the first or second trial exert a little 
 pressure, bringing them up against this and relaxing as 
 the arms go down. 
 
1 Hi 
 
 
 Exercise VII. Assume position of Figure III, thi 
 ing the head back as far as possible, and int< 
 fingers back of the head. Fill the lungs to th< 
 
 pacity, hold the breath, and then resist, and in • il 
 resistance pull the head downward, at the same til 
 haling. This is rather violent and cannol be done 
 fully at first. In beginning, two trials will be suffr 
 gradually arriving at five and never performing an) i 
 than this number of exercises at any lesson. 
 
 Exercise VIII. Assume position shown in Figure I. 
 
 Figure V. V I. 
 
 with hands at side, and exhale all of the air from the lui 
 While holding them empty draw in the abdon 
 as possible, and then extend it forward t<> its 
 pacity. Do this as rapidly and a- often 
 
220 THE SKIN, 
 
 respiration will permit. It will strengthen the stomach and 
 will reduce superfluous flesh over abdomen as no other 
 method can. This ends the exercises in breathing, and as 
 these are positively the best to be obtained the student who 
 
 learns them correctly and prac- 
 tices them methodically will be 
 positive of improvement. 
 In practicing breathing, a feel- 
 ing of dizziness is often experi- 
 enced, and in some instances the 
 action of the heart is greatly in- 
 creased. In such an event, do not 
 attempt to work until every, un- 
 comfortable sensation has depart- 
 ed, for it will not benefit. The 
 average rate of inspiration is from 
 ten to twelve seconds, with fifteen 
 
 ■"^ for exhalation. It is not neces- 
 
 Figure VII. c A , , 
 
 sary tor the average person to de- 
 velop too greatly, so when this point is reached it maybe 
 as well to continue the work at about this rate. After a 
 week or so of systematic effort the exercises may be per- 
 formed with ease in a very short time, and the vital ca- 
 pacity w 7 ill be found surprisingly increased. 
 
CHAPTER XXXI. 
 BODY M( >VEMENTS. 
 
 Fully one-half the ailments that perturb the feminine 
 portion of the world could be avoided if women would but 
 
 be persuaded to exercise properly. It, in addition, the) 
 would eat wisely, bathe systematically and rest when n< 
 sary the number of invalids would indeed be few. 
 
 Happily for the advocates of "healthful living," the 
 proper system of exercising is usually a means to an end, 
 and after the proper system of exercising has been taught, 
 the pupils, in delight at the improvement in appearance and 
 in capacity for work as well as enjoyment, are usually only 
 too anxious to proceed in the path outlined. Thus the 
 lution of the best system may be insured. 
 
 The world of to-day is an exceedingly busy one. Nearl) 
 every one is engrossed in a mad endeavor to accomplish 
 some purpose, and this object usually requires ever) spare 
 moment of time. The lined brows, nervous, twitching 
 and pallid cheeks of these victims of modern progress point 
 only too plainly to the price paid for the accomplishment. 
 This condition is not limited to any particular class, for in 
 every grade of society the number of overworked are to be 
 found. The busy housewife, nervous society woman, tired 
 clerk and overworked teacher acknowledge the ! 
 and change, but fail to find leisure in which to mak< 
 effort toward improvement. As a consequence the number 
 of interested workers in the realm of physiological d 
 ment is correspondingly small, and some plan must 
 vised by which the work may be made possible 
 classes. 
 
222 THE SKIN. 
 
 In the preceding exercises the attention has been paid 
 more particularly to the development of the lungs, improve- 
 ment of circulation and exercise of abdominal muscles with 
 a view to strengthening the diaphragm. These that follow 
 will be particularly adapted to strengthening the muscles 
 of the arms, legs and back, and will be excellent for produc- 
 ing a symmetrical development of the figure and a reduc- 
 tion of superfluous flesh. 
 
 Exercise I. Assume position of Figure II, and then 
 bend from side to side, as illustrated in Figure IV, keeping 
 the knees rigid and heels together. This exercise should 
 be performed at least twenty times with arms outstretched 
 as seen in illustration. Reduction of the hips will follow 
 the use of this exercise, and also a lengthening of the waist 
 line. 
 
 Exercise II. Assume military position, as illustrated 
 in Figure I. Then stand with the feet apart and the toe of 
 one slightly raised as the hands on one side slips down 
 toward the knee while the other is kept under the arm. 
 Alternate this work first on one side, then on the other, as 
 the one hand comes up, the other must slide down, until 
 this has been done twenty times. This is called "lifting the 
 liver" and is excellent for curing constipation. 
 
 Exercise III. Assume positions shown in line draw- 
 ings, A, B, C. First the military attitude as in A, placing 
 hands on back of chair. Then raise on tiptoes, as shown 
 in Figure B, and descend into a sitting position, as shown 
 in Figure C. In this work, ascend on the toes as high as 
 possible and descend as near the ground as can be, all of 
 the time keeping the body erect and steady. A very good 
 way to perform this work is by placing a book or some 
 other object on the head and attempt to do the work in this 
 manner. In this way the erect position will be maintained. 
 Repeat until the muscles ache. 
 
THE SKIN 
 
 
 Exercise 1\ . Assume position of Figure D 
 arms high over the head, bringing them forward in a 
 and touching the toes without bending the kne 
 urc E. This will seem ven difficult at first, but aft 
 
 short time can be easily done. 
 
 Exercise V. Repeat same exercise, but twist the 1" 
 to the side, and attempt to touch the heels instead of the 
 toes. Repeat, first on the left side and then on the right. 
 This is extremely difficult and may require too much i 
 tion from some beginners, so should be attempted 
 the first lesson and never done more than thl 
 succession. 
 
 Fig. A. 
 
 Fig. B. 
 
 Fig. C. Fig. 1 ». 
 
 
 Exercise VI. While in bending position illustrated in 
 Figure E, bring the hands against pressure, i ul at 
 side, and up as far as possible. Do this at least fn 
 
 Exercise VII. Raise the hands above th< head, 
 Figure D. Turn the arms until the palms m< r the 
 
 head, lower them with palms still upward, unl 
 with the shoulders, and then drop them to sid< 
 ercise rests the heart and is best performed during the 
 course of exercises rather than at the beginning 
 
224 THE SKIN. 
 
 Exercise VIII. Take attitude shown in Figure V, and 
 bend with hands held above the head as far backward and 
 as far forward as possible without changing position of 
 hands or allowing the knees to bend. In this exercise first 
 one foot is advanced and then the other, and the work is 
 continued until at least twenty trials have been made. 
 
 Exercise IX. This is excellent to make the body supple 
 and should be practiced diligently. Figure VI illustrates 
 nicely just the position to be maintained. The weight 
 rests on one foot and the toe of the other just misses the 
 ground, the limb being held stretched out as far as possible, 
 while a rotary motion of the entire body is practiced until 
 a semi-circle is described. 
 
 This work may be done first with one foot extended, 
 then the other, and in time will be found very easy. 
 
 Exercise X. In this, the practice of balance is made 
 possible by taking pose seen in Figure VII and by attempt- 
 ing to touch the floor with a handkerchief in the hand on 
 same side that knee is kept rigid, while the other hand is 
 held in such a manner that balance may be maintained. 
 
 This will need to be attempted many times before suc- 
 cess crowns one's efforts. 
 
 Of course there are countless changes on the exercises 
 enumerated, as well as many that are entirely different. It 
 would require so much time to perform all of them that not 
 one person in a hundred would even dream of attempting 
 them, hence just those most practical have been given. 
 
 In beginning, perhaps twenty minutes day and night 
 will be required in order to perform the work well. After 
 some little practice, twenty or twenty-five minutes will be 
 quite sufficient for this purpose. It must be remembered 
 in this work that symmetrical development means the equal 
 development of all parts of the body. Hence in exercising 
 
n II-: SKIN 
 
 there can be no favoritism shown, but, instead, th< 
 
 must be done as directed. In this waj ever) mus 
 
 be sufficiently employed. The saying thai "it is not what 
 
 we know, but what we do with what we knou that m; 
 success in business, love or health." is full) exemplified in 
 this work of developing the body. Perseverai 
 
 necessary part of any attempt of this kind and will make 
 the results exactly what they are desired to be. 
 
N. B. — It has been the aim of the author to make this 
 book a practical method of instruction for all women who 
 wish to work correctly. Any points that are not clearly 
 understood will be cheerfully explained to all who ad- 
 dress their communications to the Mcintosh Battery and 
 Optical Co., 39 W. Randolph Street, Chicago, 111. 
 
[ND 
 
 I N D E \ 
 
 Abnormally Sensitive Skin 
 
 Advisability of Using Discretion in Work! 
 After- 1 reatment by Electricity 
 
 Almonda Cream 
 
 Anecdote of Educator 
 
 Ancient Customs in Regard to Ointments 
 
 Appearance of Normal Skin , 
 
 Appearance of Pure Oils 
 
 Appliances that Cause Wrinkles 
 
 Approaching Age 
 
 Antiquity of Powder ...... ....'.'.'..'. 
 
 Arms, How to Improve 
 
 Art of Bathing ."."*' 
 
 Astringent, How Used ......... 
 
 Attainment of Perfect Development .... '. . ! ' . . . . ..[ 
 
 Bad Breath 
 
 Band, Head !.""."."!!!.".".".'!!!!!!!!."! ' I •'• ; 
 
 Bandaging Feet for Removing inflammation' '. 
 
 Bath, Bran 
 
 Bath, Electric '.V.Y... ........ .. 
 
 Bath, Faradic 
 
 Battery Fluid 115 
 
 Battery, Ideal \' m ijn 
 
 Battery, Mcintosh, Dry Cell . ' . \\ .' .' .' .' .' .' '. .' .' .' .' .' .' .' ' ) ) ' ) 
 
 Battery, Section of Faradic ...''' II- 
 
 Battery, Section of Galvanic 1 1»; 
 
 Battery, Simplest Form 
 
 Bathing, The Art of 
 
 Bath, Liquid 
 
 Bathing Powder 
 
 Bath, Sulphur 
 
 Benefit to be Found by Dieting 
 
 Benefit Derived from Electric Needle 
 
 Best Needle to Use 
 
 Blackheads 
 
 Blackheads, How to Cure 
 
 Blackheads, How to Remove 
 
 Blackheads, How to Treat 
 
 Blackheads, Special Massage- for 
 
 Bland Ointment 
 
 Blanching the Skin 
 
 Bleaching Hair on Arms 
 
 Bleaching the Hair 
 
 Bleaching Liquid for Moth Patch ... 
 
INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Bleaching Lotion for Nails 157 
 
 Bleaches, Powerful Cause Cauterization 16 
 
 Bleaching the Skin 140 
 
 Bod v Movements 221 
 
 Braii Bath 99 
 
 Bran Shampoo 181 
 
 Brush, Proper for Teeth 170 
 
 Breath, Bad 170 
 
 Breathing, Full 212 
 
 Breathing through Nostrils 214 
 
 Busy Women may Exercise 215 
 
 Care of the Feet 173 
 
 Care of the Hands 149 
 
 Care of the Hair 178 
 
 Care of Neck 161 
 
 Care of Skin 21 
 
 Cause of Age Lines 34 
 
 Causes of Obesity 202 
 
 Cauterization, Produced by Powerful Bleaches 16 
 
 Caution in Using Proper Pole 133 
 
 Certainty of Improvement in Using Proper Treatment 52 
 
 Chilblains 177 
 
 Chin, Treated by Rotary Motion 50 
 
 Cheeks, How Massaged 48 
 
 Chloasma 73 
 
 Cleansing and Opening Pimples 60 
 
 Cleansing of Scalp 180 
 
 Cleansing Mixture for Sensitive Skin 84 
 
 Clipping Hair 188 
 
 Cold Water for Pufflness of Eyes 46 
 
 Comedone Extractor 57 
 
 Comedone Extractor, L'se of 59 
 
 Constipation 68 
 
 Contents, Table of 9 
 
 Correct Breathing 215 
 
 Corn Cure 175 
 
 Coarse Pores 81 
 
 Cosmetic Defects of Mouth 166 
 
 Cosmetics, Harmful 32 
 
 Cream, Almonda 26 
 
 Creams Afford Protection 20 
 
 Creams are Necessary 20 
 
 Creme Celeste 26 
 
 Cream, Cucumber 29 
 
 Creams Do Not Cause Growth of Hair 22 
 
 Cream, Delight of Harem 27 
 
 Cream for Eruptions .. = 29 
 
 Cream, Traveler's Comfort 91 
 
 Cream Strawberry 28 
 
1\DI \ 
 
 Cucumber Cream 
 
 Cup, Sterilized 
 
 (.'tire of Blackheads, Pimples, etc 
 
 Cure of Corns 
 
 Current, Electric 1 Erection of 
 
 Current, Electric, How Produced lOfl 
 
 Current, ( ralvanic, I low to I detect I r, 
 
 Customs of Ancients in Regard to Ointments 
 
 Dandruff, Removal of I ..| 
 
 Dandruff, Simple Shampoo for 
 
 Dandruff, Tonic for . 192 
 
 Dandruff or Scurf, Treatment of I - 9 
 
 Dandruff, Varieties of 
 
 Danger of Producing Scars in Removing ;I lair... II.; 
 
 Dedication 
 
 Defects, Cosmetic of Mouth 
 
 Delight of the Harem, Cream 
 
 Depilatory Forceps 122 
 
 Depilatory, for Use on Arms . 160 
 
 Deep Lines on Neck 
 
 Deep Massage for Pimples 
 
 Dentifrice, Powdered 
 
 Dentifrice, Liquid 
 
 Development, Physiological 211 
 
 Diet Advised for Oily Skins 
 
 Diet and Directions for Home Work on Blackheads 
 
 Diet List for Increasing Flesh 
 
 Diet List for Reducing Flesh 
 
 Difficulty in Massaging Mouth. : 1" 
 
 Direction of Electric Current 
 
 Directions for Home Work on Blackheads 
 
 Discretion Advisable in Caring for Skin Ifi 
 
 Disc, Xeedle, for Removing Naevi 
 
 Discolorations of Skin 131 
 
 Disguise for Red Hands 152 
 
 Dry and Flabby Skins 
 
 Dry Cell Batteries 1 1 
 
 Dry Cell, Mcintosh Battery 185 
 
 Dusting Powder for Moist Hands 
 
 Dye, Instantaneous Hair 
 
 Dyeing the Hair 
 
 Dyes, Vegetable and Organic 
 
 Effect of Advancing Years on 1 lair ( irowth. . 
 
 Egg Shampoo 
 
 Electricity, as an After-treatment ... 
 
 Electric Current, How Produced 
 
 Electric Disturbance 
 
 Electric Battery, Ideal 
 
230 INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Electric Batterv, Simplest Form 109 
 
 Electric Bath..' 99 
 
 Electric Brush for Treating Scalp 186 
 
 Electric Current, Direction of 109 
 
 Electricity, Use of 108 
 
 Electrolysis, Outfit for 134 
 
 Electrolysis for Removing Hair 121 
 
 Electrolysis for Removing Moles 130 
 
 Emphasis on Gentle Treatment 35 
 
 Enlarging the Breasts 162 
 
 Erasing the Long Lines 43 
 
 Eruptions, Complicating Use of Electric Needle 115 
 
 Exercise for Busy Women 215 
 
 Exercises to be Practiced 216 
 
 Experiment in Producing Electricity.. 108 
 
 Experienced Worker has Knowledge 21 
 
 External Applications Necessary 17 
 
 Face, Prepared for Massage 39 
 
 Failure to Obtain Current from Battery 119 
 
 Faradic Bath 100 
 
 Faradic Battery, Section of 118 
 
 Faradic Massage 141 
 
 Feet Bandaged, for Inflammation 174 
 
 Feet, Care of 173 
 
 Feet, Massage of 174 
 
 Feet, Perspiration of 177 
 
 Finding* Hair Follicle 125 
 
 First Sign of Approaching Age 16 
 
 Flabby Skins 83 
 
 Fluid, for Battery 115 
 
 Forceps, Depilatory 122 
 
 For Painful Joints ; 175 
 
 Foot Tonic 174 
 
 Freckles, Tan and Sunburn 87 
 
 Fresh Air 215 
 
 Full Breathing 212 
 
 Galvanic Battery, Section of 116 
 
 Galvanic Current, Use of 138 
 
 Galvanic Current, How to Detect 117 
 
 Galvanic Current, Use for Bleaching 138 
 
 Galvanic Current, Used for Removing Superfluous Hair 121 
 
 Galvanic Current for Removing Moles 130 
 
 Galvanic Current, Strength Used 131 
 
 Gentle Treatment in Facial Work Emphasized 35 
 
 Green Soap, Tincture of 66 
 
 Growth of Hair as Years Advance 22 
 
 Growth of Hair not Caused by Creams 22 
 
 Gums, Treatment of 167 
 
INDEX 
 
 1 Libit Lines 
 
 Hair Brush Electrode . 
 
 Hair, Care of the 
 
 Hair Clipping , 
 
 Hair, How t I lye and Bleach 
 
 Hair and Scalp, Treatment ol IK 
 
 I lair, Vermin in , . 
 
 Hands, Care of the !'.".!!!! 
 
 Harmful Cosmetics 
 
 Hard Rubber Needle- Holder. 
 
 Head Band and Magnifying Glass 
 
 Head Lamp ' 
 
 Henna Paste 
 
 Healthy Hue of Skin ................... \i 
 
 Heart, Resting the [[[ 
 
 Hips, How to' Reduce 
 
 Hollow Spaces on Xeck 
 
 Homework in Cure of Blackheads! ............. 
 
 How to Become Plump 
 
 How to Cure Blackheads 
 
 How to Detect Galvanic Current \ \ ; 
 
 How to Dye and Bleach the Hair 
 
 How Electric Current May Be Produced ......[... 
 
 How to Grow Thin ' 
 
 How to Improve the Arms |.v» 
 
 How to Improve the Xeck and Bust 
 
 How to Improve the Shoulders 
 
 How to Massage 
 
 How to Proceed in Blackhead Work ............ 
 
 How to Prepare the Face for Massage 
 
 How to Remove Blackheads 
 
 How to Remove Moles 
 
 How to Remove Superfluous Hair 
 
 How to Sterilize 
 
 How to Tell a Good Cream •_» I 
 
 How to Use the Baths 
 
 How to Use the Neurotone 
 
 How to Use the Water Massage II 
 
 Hypodermic Syringe, How to Ise 61 
 
 Ideal Batterv 
 
 Ill-Health arid Wrinkles 
 
 Illustrations, List of 
 
 Important Features of Outfit for Electrol 
 Importance of Using Zinc Ointment. . . 
 Improvement Certain in Facial Treatments 
 
 Incrustations on Teeth 
 
 Ingrown Xails 
 
 Irritation Hastens Falking of Skin 
 
232 INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Instantaneous Hair Dye 198 
 
 Instruments, Sterilizing of 103 
 
 Inflammation, Removed by Bandaging Feet ■. , . 174 
 
 Introduction 3 
 
 Jelly, Rose 151 
 
 Jelly, Violet 98 
 
 Knowledge, Valuable of Experienced Worker 21 
 
 Lanugo, or Wool Hair 22 
 
 Lines of Age 34 
 
 Lines about the Eyes . . . : 46 
 
 Lines upon the Face 45 
 
 Lines, Caused by Weak Eyes 34 
 
 List, Diet, for Increasing Flesh 208 
 
 List, Diet, for Reducing Flesh 203 
 
 Lines on Forehead 44 
 
 Liquid Bath : 98 
 
 Liver Patches 73 
 
 Liquid Powder 95 
 
 Lotion for Rough Skin 160 
 
 Magnifying Glass 122 
 
 Magnifying Glass on Head Band 124 
 
 Mallet Treatment 52 
 
 Manicure Outfit Necessary 155 
 
 Manner of Making Powder 93 
 
 Manner of Shampooing 181 
 
 Manner of Treating Milia 70 
 
 Manufacture of Creams 24 
 
 Massage 36 
 
 Massage of Feet 174 
 
 Massage of Nose 48 
 
 Massage of Neck 51 
 
 Massage Preserves Youth 36 
 
 Massage Roller 143 
 
 Massage Roller, Use of 143 
 
 Massage, Rotary Motion , 47 
 
 Massage with Use of Faradic Current 141 
 
 Massage, Water 39 
 
 Mask for Stippled Skins 79 
 
 Masseuse Obtains Results 69 
 
 Mcintosh Dry Cell Battery 135 
 
 Mechanical Appliances, Injurious to Skin 33 
 
 Medici Powder . .: 95 
 
 Naevi, Treatment of 129 
 
 Naevi or Wine Marks 133 
 
 Nail Powder 157 
 
 Nails, Ingrown 176 
 
1 N 1 > 1 \ 
 Natural Oil of Skin 
 
 Neck and Bust, 1 low to Impri 
 Necessity for Ventilation of I [air. . . 
 Necessary Utensils in Making Creams 
 Needle, Best to I se in Electrolys 
 Needle, Bulbous Pointed for Electrolj 
 Needle Entering Hair Follicle 
 
 Needle Disc tor Remoi ing Naei i 
 
 Needle, Selection of 
 
 Negative Current, Why Used 
 
 Neglect of Scalp 
 
 Neurotone I j. 
 
 Neurotone, Use of 
 
 Nose, How Massaged 
 
 Normal Skin I \ 
 
 Nutrition of Flesh Improved 
 
 Obstinate Freckles 
 
 Oily Skins 
 
 Ointments, As Used by Ancient Nations 21 
 
 Ointments, Bland for Dandruff 
 
 Ointment for Vermin in the Hair 
 
 Ointment, Zinc 
 
 Outfit, Important Feature of Electrolysis |::i 
 
 Oxygen, a Necessity 2 l j 
 
 Patrician Hand 149 
 
 Pastilles for Breath 171 
 
 Paste for Neck and Shoulders 
 
 Paste, Strawberry 
 
 Painful Sunburn 
 
 Perfect Development, When Attained 
 
 Perspiration of Feet ITS 
 
 Perfect Teeth 
 
 Peroxide of Hydrogen for Muddy Skins 
 
 Physiological Development 210 
 
 Pigment Cells 16 
 
 Pimples 
 
 Powerful Bleaches Cause Cauterization 16 
 
 Powder, Bathing 
 
 Powder for Dusting into Shoes U • 
 
 Positive Pole, How Used 
 
 Powerful Remedies for Treating Moth Patch 
 
 Removal of Superfluous I lair 1 
 
 Removal of Moles 
 
 Resting the Heart 
 
 Resuscitation of the Drowned I ' '■' 
 
 Results, Obtained bv Masseuse 
 
 Roller 
 
234 INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Rotary Motion, On and About Chin 50 
 
 Rose Jelly 151 
 
 Saving the Hands 152 
 
 Scalp, Bland Ointment for 192 
 
 Scalp Cleanser 191 
 
 Scales Cast off Constantly 16 
 
 Scaly, Dry and Flabby Skins 83 
 
 Scalp and Hair, Treatment of 184 
 
 Scalp Massage 185 
 
 Scars, Danger of Producing 113 
 
 Scars, Left by Pimples Improperly Treated 62 
 
 Scurf or Dandruff, Treatment of 189 
 
 Section of Faradic Battery 118 
 
 Section of Galvanic Battery 116 
 
 Selection of Needle 125 
 
 Shampoo, Bran 181 
 
 Shampoo Mixture 182 
 
 Shoulders, How to Improve 159 
 
 Simplest Form of Galvanic Cell 109 
 
 Simple Shampoo for Dandruff 192 
 
 Skin, Blanching the 137 
 
 Skin, Bleaching the 140 
 
 Skin, Discolorations of 137 
 
 Skin Food 30 
 
 Skin Possessed of Natural Oil 15 
 
 Smooth Skin after Successful Work 63 
 
 Soap 101 
 
 Soothing Ointment for Mouth 167 
 
 Solution for Receding Gums 168 
 
 Stimulating the Skin By Faradic Current 142 
 
 Stimulating Tonic 185 
 
 Stippled and Sallow Skins 77 
 
 Sterilizing Instruments 103 
 
 Sterilization of Massage Cup 39 
 
 Strawberry Cream 28 
 
 Strawberry Paste 28 
 
 Street Current with Rheostat Ill 
 
 Strengthening the Muscles 222 
 
 Subject to Sterilizing Instruments 103 
 
 Substitutes for Oils 23 
 
 Success of Treatments, Properly Given 19 
 
 Sulphur Bath 99 
 
 Sunburn 87 
 
 Systematic Work Valuable 37 
 
 Table of Contents 9 
 
 Table of Correct Body Weights 204 
 
 Tan and Sunburn '. . 87 
 
 Teeth 165 
 
[ N D 
 
 Teeth, Perfect 
 
 The [deal Masseuse 
 
 The Mouth and Teeth 
 
 Thick ... I., 
 
 Tincture of ( rreen Soap 
 
 Tinting Powder 
 
 Tonic for I >andruff 
 
 Tonic for Oily Scalp 
 
 Tonic for Stimulating I [air 
 
 Toothache Remedy 
 
 Travelers' Comfort Cream 
 
 Traveling Made Comfortable by Creams 
 
 Treatment of 1 )andruff or Scurf 
 
 Treatment of Pimples 
 
 Treatment of Moles, Warts and Naei i 
 
 Treatments, Properly ( riven, Successful 19 
 
 Treatment of Scalp and Hair 
 
 Use of Astringent 
 
 Use of Creams, When Traveling 
 
 Using the Comedone Extractor 
 
 Use of Electricity 
 
 Use of the Faradic Current Ml 
 
 Use of Galvanic Current 188 
 
 Using the Hair Brush Electrode 186 
 
 Using Hypoderimc Syringe 
 
 Use of the Massage Roller 
 
 Use of the Neurotone 
 
 .Use of Powder 
 
 Use of Water Massage 11 
 
 Use of the Vibratile I rfi 
 
 Utensils Necessary in Making Creams 
 
 Value of Systematic Work 
 
 Value of Taking Rest 
 
 Varieties of Blackheads 
 
 Vegetable and Organic Dyes 
 
 Vegetable Powder 
 
 Vertical Lines 
 
 Vibratile 
 
 Vibratile in Use 
 
 Violet Jelly 
 
 Vermin in Hair ' v - 
 
 Warts, Treatment of 
 
 Wash, for Mouth 
 
 Water Massage 
 
 Wet Cell Batteries ] [ { 
 
 Weak Eyes Cause Lines 
 
 Weather Worn Appearance Caused by Tan. 
 
236 INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Weights, Table of Body 204 
 
 What Causes Wrinkles 32 
 
 Whitening Paste for the Hands 152 
 
 Why Creams are Necessary 20 
 
 Why we Massage 36 
 
 Withered Skins 84 
 
 Wool Hair, or Lanugo 22 
 
 Woman, Busy, May Exercise 215 
 
 Work of Electrolysis Remunerative 115 
 
 Work, How Long to, in Electrolysis 113 
 
 Work of Massaging the Face 44 
 
 Work on Warty Growths 132 
 
 Wrinkles, and What Causes Them 32 
 
 Wrinkle Treatment, Certainty of Imprvement in 52 
 
 Youthful Appearance of Ancient Greeks 21 
 
 Youth, Preserved by Massage 36 
 
 Zinc Ointment 128 
 
 Zinc Powder 114 
 
MARIN EI. I. () 
 
 Automatic or Water Massage. 
 
 Mallets 
 
 Comedone Extractor 
 
 Antiseptic Lotion 
 
 Lettuce Cream 
 
 Acne Cream 
 
 Whitening Cream 
 
 Tissue Food 
 
 Zinc Ointment 
 
 Paste Soap. 
 
 Finishing Cream 
 
 Vegetable Powder 
 
 Creme Celeste 
 
 price, c< nnplete, 
 
 • 
 
 
 MANUF \< Tl'Ki I) I'N 
 
 MARINELLO COM P A N Y 
 
 CHICAGO, ILL. 
 
 \\ IS 
 
Electric Massage Battery 
 
 Prepare the face with Lettuce Cream. Allow the patient to hold in his hand 
 the metal Electrode attached to the battery. Attach the No. 1 handle and spongio 
 disc to the other pole of the battery, and apply it to the forehead and face accord- 
 ing- to the tolerance of the patient. The Spongio Disc must be thoroughly wet, 
 as the electricity passes through the moisture, and cannot pass through dry 
 spongio. This application is especially beneficial in treatment of Headache, Neu- 
 ralgia and Nervous Fatigue. The Massage Roller is used in the same manner 
 as the Spongio Disc. Its especial merit is that when the chamois is well moistened 
 a stronger current may be applied regularly to face and neck. 
 
 Send for complete catalogue. 
 
 McINTOSH BATTERY AND OPTICAL CO. 
 
 39 West Randolph Street, Chicago, III. 
 
 W